JP2018075199A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To improve a taste of a game.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 1 causes a first time-shortening counter to count the total number of times of a first special symbol notification display and of a second special symbol notification display executed during time-shortening control. Further, a second time-shortening counter counts the number of times of the second special symbol notification display executed during the time-shortening control. The time-shortening control is terminated when one condition out of a plurality of conditions is established, the plurality of conditions including that the number of times counted by the first time-shortening counter reaches the first number of times of time shortening, and the number of times counted by the second time-shortening counter reaches the second number of times of time shortening. Further, in response to a start of the time-shortening control, a second special variation counter starts to count the number of times of executing the second special symbol notification display. In special symbol variation pattern determination based on special symbol 2 operation-start information, a type of the variation pattern is determined on the basis of the number of times counted by the second special variation counter.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 48

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a winning determination for determining whether or not to cause a specific gaming state based on game information acquired in response to establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and in particular, to satisfy a predetermined start condition. Accordingly, the present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a predetermined gaming state that facilitates establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition is started.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a predetermined gaming state that facilitates establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition according to establishment of a predetermined start condition is known (see Patent Document 1).
In this gaming machine, a big hit lottery is executed in response to a game ball entering the first start port or the second start port (establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition). When the jackpot lottery is won, a jackpot gaming state is generated.
In addition, in this gaming machine, a short-time gaming state (predetermined gaming state) that facilitates the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting port is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state (satisfaction of a predetermined start condition). . At this time, if the jackpot lottery executed during the occurrence of the short-time gaming state and the occurrence of the high-probability gaming state is won, the first short-time termination condition is set as the termination condition of the short-time gaming state. The On the other hand, when winning the jackpot lottery executed during the occurrence of the short-time gaming state and during the occurrence of the low-probability gaming state, the second short-time termination condition is set as the termination condition of the short-time gaming state. .
The first short-time end condition is satisfied when the number of jackpot lotteries executed during the occurrence of the short-time game state has reached 30 [times], and the second short-time end condition is the short-time game state This is established in response to the number of jackpot lotteries executed during the occurrence of 100 reaching 100 [times].

JP 2012-50643 A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the interest of the game is reduced.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, as a condition for ending the short-time gaming state, the number of jackpot lotteries executed when the game ball enters the first start opening, and the game ball entering the second start opening Only the conditions based on the number of times of jackpot lottery executed with the number of times and the number of times added are set. Therefore, the opportunity to end the short-time gaming state becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced.
In particular, in a conventional gaming machine, it is not possible to determine a notification display mode for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery according to the number of jackpot lotteries executed after the start of the short-time gaming state. Therefore, the mode of notification display becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced.
The subject of this invention is improving the interest of a game.

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention includes a first game information acquisition unit that acquires first game information in response to establishment of a first acquisition condition, and the first game information acquisition unit. First game information storage means for storing the first game information acquired by the predetermined number as an upper limit; second game information acquisition means for acquiring second game information in response to establishment of the second acquisition condition; Second game information storage means for storing the second game information acquired by the second game information acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit, and the first game information storage means according to the establishment of the first start condition. Based on the stored first game information, a first start time determination that includes a winning determination for determining whether or not to cause a specific gaming state and a notification mode determination for determining a notification mode is executed. According to the start time determination means and the establishment of the second start condition And a winning determination for determining whether or not to cause the specific gaming state based on the second gaming information stored in the second gaming information storage means, and a notification mode determination for determining the notification mode. (2) When the first start time determination is executed, the first notification display is executed according to the notification mode determined by the first start time determination. And a second notification display means for executing a second notification display according to the notification mode determined by the second start time determination when the second start time determination is executed. A predetermined gaming state control means for starting a predetermined gaming state that facilitates the establishment of the second acquisition condition in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition; a first notification display and a first notification executed during the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state; 2 First count for counting the total number of notification displays And a second counting means for counting the number of times of the second notification display executed during the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state, and the counting of the number of executions of the second notification display is started in response to the start of the predetermined gaming state. And the predetermined gaming state control means counts the total number of times counted by the first counting means and reaches the first predetermined number of times, and is counted by the second counting means. When one condition is satisfied among a plurality of conditions including that the number of times has reached the second predetermined number of times, the predetermined gaming state is terminated, and the second start time determining means is controlled by the third counting means. The notification mode is determined based on the counted number of times.

In the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the first counting means counts the total number of times of the first notification display and the second notification display executed during the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state. In addition, the second counting means counts the number of times of the second notification display executed during the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state. The predetermined gaming state includes that the total number of times counted by the first counting means has reached the first predetermined number of times, and that the number of times counted by the second counting means has reached the second predetermined number of times. The process is terminated when one of a plurality of conditions is satisfied.
Accordingly, a plurality of conditions having different contents are set as conditions for ending the predetermined gaming state.
Therefore, it is possible to diversify the trigger for ending the predetermined game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In the gaming machine according to the first aspect, counting of the number of executions of the second notification display by the third counting means is started in response to the start of the predetermined gaming state. In the notification mode determination based on the second game information, the notification mode is determined based on the number of times counted by the third counting means.
Thereby, the notification mode according to the second notification display can be determined according to the number of times of the second notification display executed after the start of the predetermined gaming state.
In particular, according to the number of times of the second notification display executed after the start of the predetermined gaming state, the notification mode related to the second notification display executed after the end of the predetermined gaming state can be determined.
Therefore, the notification mode related to the second notification display can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the first acquisition condition corresponds to detection of a game ball entering a first start port 51 described later. As the first game information, special figure 1 start information described later corresponds. The first game information acquisition unit corresponds to a main control circuit 200 (step S7-3) described later. The first game information storage means corresponds to a special figure 1 startup information storage area described later. The second acquisition condition corresponds to detection of a game ball entering a second start port 52 described later. As the second game information, special figure 2 start information described later corresponds. The second game information acquisition unit corresponds to a main control circuit 200 (step S8-3) described later. The second game information storage means corresponds to a special figure 2 start information storage area which will be described later. As a first start condition, a “special game phase” to be described later is in a “special figure change waiting state”, the special figure 2 hold number is “0”, and the special figure 1 hold number is “1” or more. This is true. The specific gaming state corresponds to a jackpot gaming state described later. As the winning determination, a special figure winning determination described later is applicable. The notification mode corresponds to a type of variation pattern described later. As the notification mode determination, special figure fluctuation pattern determination described later is applicable. The determination at the time of the first start corresponds to the start determination based on the special figure 1 start information described later. The first starting time determination means corresponds to a main control circuit 200 (steps S11-4 to S11-7) described later. The second start condition corresponds to a “special game phase” to be described later being in a “special figure change waiting state” and a special figure 2 holding number being “1” or more. The determination at the time of the second start corresponds to the start determination based on the special figure 2 start information described later. The second starting time determination means corresponds to a main control circuit 200 (steps S11-4 to S11-7) described later. The first notification display corresponds to a notification display of a first special symbol which will be described later. As the first notification display means, a special figure 1 display device 61 described later corresponds. The second notification display corresponds to a notification display of a second special symbol described later. As the second notification display means, a special figure 2 display device 62 to be described later corresponds. The predetermined gaming state corresponds to a state in which a time reduction control described later is being executed. The predetermined game state control means corresponds to a main control circuit 200 (step S45-4) described later. As the first counting means, a first time reduction counter described later corresponds. As the second counting means, a second time reduction counter described later corresponds. As the third counting means, a second special variation counter described later corresponds. The first predetermined number of times corresponds to a first time reduction number described later. As the second predetermined number of times, a second time reduction number described later corresponds.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the second start time determining means is such that the number of times counted by the third counting means has not reached the second predetermined number of times. Regardless of the number of second game information stored in the second game information storage means, the predetermined notification mode is determined, and the number counted by the third count means is the second predetermined number of times. When it has reached, the notification mode according to the number of second game information stored in the second game information storage means is determined.
In the gaming machine according to the second aspect, during the occurrence of the predetermined game state, the predetermined notification mode is determined regardless of the number of second game information stored in the second game information storage means. On the other hand, during the non-occurrence of the predetermined game state, the notification mode corresponding to the number of second game information stored in the second game information storage means is determined.
This makes it possible to further diversify the notification mode related to the second notification display and improve the interest of the game.

A gaming machine according to a third invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second invention, starts counting the total number of executions of the first notification display and the second notification display in response to the start of the predetermined gaming state. The first start time determining means determines the notification mode based on the total number of executions counted by the fourth counting means.
In the gaming machine according to the third invention, counting of the total number of executions of the first notification display and the second notification display by the fourth counting means is started in response to the start of the predetermined gaming state. In the notification mode determination based on the first game information, the notification mode is determined based on the number of times counted by the fourth counting means.
Thereby, the notification mode related to the first notification display can be determined according to the total number of the first notification display and the second notification display executed after the start of the predetermined gaming state.
In particular, according to the total number of times of the first notification display and the second notification display executed after the start of the predetermined gaming state, the notification mode related to the first notification display executed after the end of the predetermined gaming state may be determined. it can.
Therefore, the notification mode related to the first notification display can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.
Here, as the fourth counting means, a first special fluctuation counter described later corresponds.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of games.

It is a perspective view which shows the whole structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a flowchart which shows CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows a main loop process. It is a flowchart which shows the evacuation process at the time of a power supply interruption. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows switch management processing. It is a flowchart which shows a usual start ball | bowl detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a special game management process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric role opening / closing switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening release control process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening closing effective process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening release end wait process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for opening an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory release control process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory closed effective process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory release completion | finish weight process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal game management process. It is a flowchart which shows a usual figure change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a usual figure stop. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric role opening / closing switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release control process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory closing effective process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release completion | finish weight process. It is a flowchart which shows a launch position designation | designated management process. It is a flowchart which shows production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production management process. It is a flowchart which shows a stop production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit effect management process. It is a figure which shows a prior determination result pattern. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot production management process. It is a flowchart which shows V winning effect production management processing. It is a flowchart which shows an addition production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows a launch position display management process. It is a figure which shows an example of the progress of the game in the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the value of a time reduction counter, and the value of a time reduction control flag area | region. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the value of a special fluctuation counter, and the value of a special fluctuation flag area | region. It is a figure which shows the content of the fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to special figure 1 starting information. It is a figure which shows the content of the fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to special figure 2 starting information.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of the pachinko machine.
A pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 includes a rectangular outer frame 2, an inner frame 3 disposed on the front side of the outer frame 2, and a door unit 4 disposed on the front side of the inner frame 3. Yes.
The inner frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape and is disposed so as to be able to open and close with respect to the outer frame 2. A game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the inner side of the inner frame 3.
The door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape and is disposed so as to be able to open and close with respect to the outer frame 2. Thereby, the door unit 4 can open and close the front side of a game board unit 10 (game board 11 described later) attached to the inner frame 3. The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a disposed substantially at the center, a decorative portion 4b disposed around the transparent plate 4a, a tray unit 5 disposed below the transparent plate 4a, and a tray. A firing handle 6 disposed on the side of the unit 5.
The transparent plate 4 a is formed in a flat plate shape using a transparent material such as resin or glass, and is disposed on the front side of the game board unit 10 (game area 30) attached to the inner frame 3. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game board unit 10 (game area 30) through the transparent plate 4a.
The decorative portion 4b is formed of a transparent or translucent resin material, and has a shape that bulges forward. Each corner on the upper side of the decorative portion 4b is provided with a sound extraction portion 4c in which a sound generator (speaker) 22 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. Each sound extraction part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output from the sound generator 22 passes.
A plurality of frame lamps 20 are disposed inside the decorative portion 4b. Each frame lamp 20 has a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The saucer unit 5 includes a saucer 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c disposed on the front side of the saucer 5a.
The effect button 5b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and is disposed so as to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. The effect button 5b can be pressed by the player (pressed downward). Inside the saucer unit 5, a first operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is disposed. The first operation detection switch 25 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 (see FIG. 3) every time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called “jog dial”) is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and is disposed so as to surround the effect button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated by a player (operation to rotate about a cylindrical axis). Inside the tray unit 5, a second operation detection switch 26 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c is disposed. The second operation detection switch 26 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 every time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 [°]).

A lending operation unit 7 is disposed on the upper surface of the tray unit 5. The lending operation unit 7 includes a ball lending button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit 500 (see FIG. 3) capable of reading and updating information recorded on the prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 500, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 500 is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated in a state where the prepaid card is inserted into the CR unit 500, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the tray 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of paid-out game balls, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the return button 7 b is operated in a state where the prepaid card having the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit 500, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 500.
Here, the prepaid cart corresponds to, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, or the like.
The firing handle 6 can be rotated by the player. Inside the firing handle 6, a firing volume (not shown) for detecting the angle at which the firing handle 6 is rotated is disposed. The firing volume outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control circuit 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of the game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board unit.
The game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the front side of the set board, an image display device 23 and a drum type display device 24 attached to the back side of the set board, It has.
The set plate is formed in a box shape whose front side is open. An opening made of a through hole is provided at a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is formed in a flat plate shape with resin. As shown in FIG. 2, an opening (not shown) made of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the game board 11. Then, the player visually recognizes the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 and the drums 24a to 24c of the drum type display device 24 through the openings provided in the game board 11 and the openings provided in the set board. It is possible to do.
Around the opening in the front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which game balls launched in response to the rotation operation of the launch handle 6 flow down. In the game area 30, a left path 30 a formed on the left side of the image display device 23 and the drum type display device 24 and a right side of the image display device 23 and the drum type display device 24 are formed as a path through which the game balls flow down. The right path 30b is formed.
A plurality of board surface lamps 21 (see FIG. 3) are disposed in the game area 30 of the game board 11. Each panel lamp 21 has a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The image display device 23 includes a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. The image display device 23 has a display screen 23a capable of displaying effect images.
On the display screen 23a, a fourth effect symbol display area (not shown) in which a fourth effect symbol (not shown) is displayed can be configured. The fourth effect symbol is configured to include identification information (symbol) such as numerals, characters, symbols, and the like.
In the fourth effect symbol display area, it is possible to perform change display and stop display of the fourth effect symbol. The variation display of the fourth effect symbol means that the type of the fourth effect symbol displayed in the fourth effect symbol display area is sequentially changed every predetermined time. The stop display of the fourth effect symbol means that one type of the fourth effect symbol is continuously displayed in the fourth effect symbol display area for a predetermined time.
The display screen 23a can be configured with reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) in which reserved symbols (not shown) are displayed. In the hold symbol display area b1, a hold symbol corresponding to the start information during the notification display (special symbol variation display and stop display) is displayed. In the hold symbol display area b2, a hold symbol corresponding to the start information for which the notification display is held is displayed.

The drum-type display device 24 includes a left drum 24a, a center drum 24b, and a right drum 24c, which are arranged coaxially with each other.
Each of the drums 24a to 24c is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and reel data is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. Each of the drums 24a to 24c has a rotation shaft (not shown) disposed along the central axis. Each of the drums 24a to 24c is arranged so that the rotation axis extends along the left-right direction (the left-right direction shown in FIG. 2), and is arranged to be able to rotate around the rotation axis.
In the reel data pasted on the outer peripheral surface of the left drum 24a, a plurality of first effect symbols (not shown) are displayed along the rotation direction. Each first effect symbol is configured to include identification information (symbol) such as a number, a character, a symbol, and a character.
The left drum 24a can perform change display and stop display of the first effect symbol. The variation display of the first effect symbol means that the first effect symbol displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the left drum 24a is sequentially replaced as the left drum 24a rotates. The stop display of the first effect symbol means that when the rotation of the left drum 24a is stopped, one first effect symbol is displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the left drum 24a.
A plurality of second effect symbols (not shown) are displayed along the rotation direction in the reel data attached to the outer peripheral surface of the central drum 24b. Each second effect design includes identification information (design) such as numbers, characters, symbols, characters, and the like.
The center drum 24b can perform a change display and a stop display of the second effect symbol. The variation display of the second effect symbol means that the second effect symbol displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the central drum 24b is sequentially replaced by the rotation of the central drum 24b. The stop display of the second effect symbol means that when the rotation of the central drum 24b is stopped, one second effect symbol is displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the central drum 24b.
In the reel data pasted on the outer peripheral surface of the right drum 24c, a plurality of third effect symbols (not shown) are displayed along the rotation direction. Each third effect symbol is configured to include identification information (symbol) such as numerals, characters, symbols, characters, and the like.
The right drum 24c can display the change and stop display of the third effect symbol. The variation display of the third effect symbol means that the third effect symbol displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the right drum 24c is sequentially replaced by the rotation of the right drum 24c. The stop display of the third effect symbol means that when the rotation of the right drum 24c stops, one third effect symbol is displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the right drum 24c.

The drum-type display device 24 includes stepping motors (not shown) corresponding to the respective drums 24a to 24c and position detection sensors (not shown) corresponding to the respective drums 24a to 24c.
Each stepping motor rotates the drums 24a to 24c corresponding to the stepping motor. Each stepping motor is driven in accordance with a pulse signal input from the effect control circuit 300.
Each position detection sensor outputs a detection signal to the effect control circuit 300 in response to detection of the origin position (rotation position) of the drums 24 a to 24 c corresponding to the position detection sensor.
The effect control circuit 300 outputs a pulse signal (frequency, number of pulses, etc.) output to the stepping motor corresponding to each of the drums 24a to 24c, a detection signal input from a position detection sensor corresponding to the drum, The state of the drum (rotation / stop, rotation direction, rotation speed, type of effect symbol displayed at a predetermined stop position, etc.) is controlled based on

A first start port 51 is provided below the drum type display device 24 in the game area 30. The first start port 51 is a ball entrance that opens upward (so-called “nose”), and game balls can always be entered. The first start port 51 is capable of entering a game ball that flows down the left path (cannot enter a game ball that flows down the right path).
On the back side of the game board 11, a special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. In response to the detection of a game ball that has entered the first start port 51 (the game ball has entered the first start port 51), the special FIG. 1 start ball detection sensor 101 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 (FIG. 3). The main control circuit 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101.
On the left side of the first start opening 51 in the game area 30, an upper left other winning opening 55 and a lower left other winning opening 56 are provided. The upper left other winning hole 55 is a ball opening that is opened obliquely upward to the right, and a game ball can always be entered. On the other hand, the lower left other winning opening 56 is a ball opening opening upward, and game balls can always be entered. Each of the other winning holes 55 and 56 can enter a game ball flowing down the left path (cannot enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
On the back side of the game board 11, a left other winning ball detection sensor 106 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. The left other winning ball detection sensor 106 detects a game ball that has entered the other winning holes 55 and 56 (a game ball entering the upper left other winning port 55 or the lower left other winning port 56). Is output to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation for a prize ball in response to an input of a detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106.

A start gate 41 is provided on the right side of the display screen 24 a in the game area 30. The start gate 41 is formed so that it can always be passed by a game ball. The start gate 41 is capable of passing a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot pass a game ball flowing down the left path).
The start gate 41 is provided with a normal start ball detection sensor 104 (see FIG. 3). The normal start ball detection sensor 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passing of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control circuit 200 executes the normal symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the general-purpose starting ball detection sensor 104.
A right other prize winning port 57 is provided below the start gate 41 in the game area 30. The other right winning port 57 is a ball opening that opens upward, and game balls can always be entered. The other right winning port 57 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
On the back side of the game board 11, a right other winning ball detection sensor 107 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. The right other winning ball detection sensor 107 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the right other winning port 57 (game ball entering the right other winning port 57). Output. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball in response to the input of the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107.

A second start port 52 is provided below the right other winning port 57 in the game area 30. In the second start port 52, a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter a game ball into the second start port 52, and allows a game ball to enter the second start port 52 (easily). In addition, an ordinary electric combination (ordinary electric combination) 52a (so-called “velo”) that can be displaced is provided. The second starting port 52 can enter a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
In the present embodiment, the second start port 52 is a substantially square hole that opens toward the front side. The ordinary electric accessory 52 a has an opening / closing plate (not shown) that opens and closes the second starting port 52. The opening / closing plate is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape. The opening / closing plate has an opening / closing shaft provided along the lower side thereof. The opening / closing shaft extends along the left-right direction. The opening / closing plate can be displaced (opened / closed) in a door shape around the opening / closing axis. Specifically, the opening / closing plate can be displaced between a first state in which the second start port 52 is closed and a second state in which the upper side is tilted toward the front side.
When the ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced to the closed state, the opening / closing plate is displaced to the first state, thereby preventing the game ball flowing down the right path from entering the second starting port 52. The On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced to the open state, the open / close plate is displaced to the second state, so that the game ball dropped on the back surface of the open / close plate is guided to the second start port 52. .
The ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened / closed) by a start port solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). The second starting port 52 is normally closed with the ordinary electric accessory 52a closed, so that it is impossible to enter a game ball. However, when the normal symbol lottery is won, 52a is opened, and a game ball can be entered.
On the back side of the game board 11, a special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. The special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the second start port 52 (the game ball has entered the second start port 52). Output. The main control circuit 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the detection signal input from the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102.

An accessory winning device 54 is provided below the second start opening 52 in the game area 30. The prize winning device 54 includes a entrance (not shown) that opens toward the right side, and a special electric accessory 54a (so-called “blade”) that opens and closes the entrance. The prize winning device 54 can enter a game ball that flows down the right path (cannot enter a game ball that flows down the left path).
The special electric accessory 54a allows a game ball to enter the accessory winning device 54 and a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the accessory winning device 54 (easy). It is possible to be displaced to the open state.
In the present embodiment, the special electric accessory 54a has an opening / closing piece (not shown) that opens and closes the entrance.
The opening / closing piece is formed in a piece having a predetermined length. An opening / closing shaft (not shown) is provided at the lower end of the opening / closing piece. The opening / closing axis extends along the depth direction (the depth direction shown in FIG. 2). The opening / closing piece can be displaced (opened / closed) in the shape of a door around the opening / closing axis. Specifically, the opening / closing piece can be displaced between a first state in which the entrance is closed and a second state in which the upper end side is tilted toward the right side.

When the special electric accessory 54a is displaced to the closed state, the opening / closing piece is displaced to the first state, thereby preventing the game ball flowing down the right path from entering the accessory winning device 54. Is done. On the other hand, when the special electric accessory 54a is displaced to the open state, the opening / closing piece is displaced to the second state, so that the game ball dropped on the side surface of the opening / closing piece is guided into the accessory winning device 54. The
The special electric accessory 54a is displaced (opened / closed) by an accessory solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3). In the bonus winning device 54, the special electric accessory 54a is normally closed so that it is impossible to enter a game ball. However, in the small hit game described later, In the open state, a game ball can be entered.
An accessory winning ball detection sensor 105 (see FIG. 3) is disposed on the back side of the game board 11. The prize winning ball detection sensor 105 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball (the game ball entering the prize winning device 54) entered in the prize winning device 54. Output. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball in response to the input of the detection signal from the winning prize winning ball detection sensor 105.

In the prize winning device 54, a V area (not shown) that can be passed by a game ball, a discharge area (not shown) that can be passed by a game ball, and a ball in the prize winning device 54. Distributing means (not shown) for distributing the played game balls to one of the V region and the discharge region is provided.
In the V region, a V winning ball detection sensor 108 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. The V winning ball detection sensor 108 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has passed through the V region (passing through the V region by the game ball). The main control circuit 200 sets a V winning flag area to be described later in response to an input of a detection signal from the V winning ball detection sensor 108.
The distribution means includes a V passing state in which game balls that have entered the prize winning device 54 are distributed to the V area, a non-V passing state in which game balls that have entered the prize winning apparatus 54 are allocated to the discharge area, It is possible to be displaced.
As a result, when the sorting means is displaced to the V passing state, it becomes impossible for the game ball that has entered the prize winning device 54 to pass through the discharge area, and the game that has entered the prize winning device 54 The sphere is distributed to the V region. On the other hand, when the allocating means is displaced to the non-V passing state, it is impossible to pass the V area by the game ball that has entered the prize winning device 54, and the game that has entered the prize winning device 54 The balls are distributed to the discharge area. The distribution means is displaced by a V distribution solenoid 67 (see FIG. 3).
The game balls that have entered the prize winning device 54 are distributed to one of the V area and the discharge area by the distributing means, and after passing through one of the V area and the discharge area, to the back side of the game board 11 Discharged. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the prize winning device 54 passes through one of the V area and the discharge area after being detected by the prize winning ball detection sensor 105, and the back of the game board 11. Discharged to the side.

A big prize device 53 is provided below the prize winning device 54 in the game area 30. The big winning device 53 has a ball entrance (not shown) that opens toward the right side, and a special electric accessory 53a (so-called “slide attacker”) that opens and closes the ball entrance. The big winning device 53 can enter a game ball that flows down the right path (cannot enter a game ball that flows down the left path).
The special electric accessory 53a enables the game ball to enter the large winning device 53 in a closed state and makes the game ball into the large winning device 53 possible (easy). It can be displaced to the open state.
In the present embodiment, the big winning device 53 is provided in a pair of transparent plates (not shown), a game ball receiving portion (not shown) disposed between the pair of transparent plates, and the game ball receiving portion. And a entrance. Further, the special electric accessory 53a has an opening / closing plate (not shown) for opening and closing the entrance.
Each transparent plate is formed in a flat plate shape using a transparent or translucent material. Each transparent plate is arranged substantially in parallel to the front surface (game area 30) of the game board 11. The pair of transparent plates are arranged substantially parallel to each other. In addition, the pair of transparent plates is arranged at a predetermined interval so that the game ball can pass between the pair of transparent plates. A plurality of ridges are provided at a position above the opening / closing plate in front of the transparent plate on the back side. In addition, a plurality of ridges are provided at a position above the opening / closing plate on the back side of the transparent plate on the front side. Each protrusion is provided so as to extend along the vertical direction (the vertical direction shown in FIG. 2).
The receiving part is formed in a substantially square box shape. In the receiving portion, an upper surface thereof is opened, and a ball entrance opening toward the upper side is formed.
The opening / closing plate is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape. The opening / closing plate is disposed with its upper surface inclined (inclined so that the left side is low and the right side is high). The opening / closing plate can be displaced along the depth direction. Specifically, the opening / closing plate has a first position on the front side of the game board 11 (a first position for closing the entrance) through a transparent plate on the back side and a through hole provided in the game board 11; It can be displaced to a second position on the back side of the game board 11 (a second position where the entrance is opened). Here, the first position is a position between the pair of transparent plates.

When the special electric accessory 53a is displaced to the closed state, the open / close plate is displaced to the first state, thereby preventing the game ball flowing down the right path from entering the big winning device 53. The At this time, in the big winning device 53, the game ball can be retained (stored) on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. That is, the game ball dropped on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate arranged at the first position rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate toward the left side. At this time, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate is slowed by coming into contact with each protrusion provided on each transparent plate. This makes it possible to retain the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate.
On the other hand, when the special electric accessory 53a is displaced to the open state, the open / close plate is displaced to the second state, so that the game ball that has dropped onto the entrance hole enters the big winning device 53. Further, when the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate arranged at the first position, if the opening / closing plate is displaced from the first position to the second position, it stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. A game ball that has been entered enters the grand prize winning device 53.
The special electric accessory 53a is displaced (opened / closed) by a special prize opening solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). In the normal winning device 53, the special electric accessory 53a is normally closed so that a game ball cannot be entered. Thus, it is possible to enter a game ball.
On the back side of the game board 11, a special winning ball detection sensor 103 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. The big winning ball detection sensor 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the big winning device 53 (the game ball has entered the big winning device 53). . The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball in response to the input of the detection signal from the big winning ball detection sensor 103.

A first out port 58 for discharging game balls from the game area 30 is provided at the lowest position in the game area 30. In addition, a second out port 59 for discharging game balls from the game region 30 is provided between the upper left other winning port 55 and the lower left other winning port 56 in the game region 30.
An out ball detection sensor 109 (see FIG. 3) is disposed on the back side of the game board 11. The out ball detection sensor 109 mainly controls the detection signal in response to the detection of the game ball (the game ball entering the first out port 58 or the second out port 59) entering each of the out ports 58 and 59. Output to the circuit 200. Here, the out-sphere detection sensor 109 may output the detection signal to the effect control circuit 300.
Furthermore, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged in the game area 30 so as to guide the game balls to the entrances 51 to 57 and the start gate 41.

A state display device 63 (see FIG. 3) is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 11. The status display device 63 is configured by an LED or the like. The status display device 63 includes a special figure 1 hold number display, a special figure 2 hold number display, a universal figure hold number display, a round number display, a launch position display, and the like.
The special figure 1 number-of-holds indicator displays the number of times the display of the lottery results of the first special symbol lottery is suspended (special figure 1 number of holds). The special figure 2 number-of-holds indicator displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is suspended (special figure 2 number of reservations). The number of times that the display of the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is put on hold is displayed on the usual figure hold number display (the number of hold of the normal figure). On the round number display, the type of the big hit gaming state (the number of round games executed) is displayed. The launch position indicator displays a path (one of the left path and the right path) that specifies the launch of the game ball.

Also, at a predetermined position of the game board 11, there are a general figure display device 60 (see FIG. 3), a special figure 1 display device 61 (see FIG. 3), and a special figure 2 display device (see FIG. 3) 62. Is provided.
Each display device 60, 61, 62 is configured by a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix LED, or the like.
The general-purpose display device 60 can perform variable display and stop display of normal symbols made up of numbers, symbols, symbols, and the like. Then, the general symbol display device 60 displays the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the stopped normal symbol. Here, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the universal symbol display device 60 becomes a specific symbol, a gaming state per universal symbol which is a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.
The special figure 1 display device 61 can perform a variable display and a stop display of the first special symbol made up of numerals, symbols, symbols, and the like. And in the special figure 1 display apparatus 61, the result of the 1st special symbol lottery is displayed by the 1st special symbol stopped and displayed.
The special figure 2 display device 62 can perform variable display and stop display of the second special symbol made up of numbers, symbols, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device 62, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped second special symbol.

Here, the display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) on the special symbol display devices 61 and 62 and the effect symbol (first effect symbol to fourth effect) on the image display device 23 and the drum type display device 24. The display of the symbol) is associated with each of the timing when the variable display is started, the timing when the stop display is started, the lottery result indicated by the symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the like.
Specifically, in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the variable display of the effect symbol (the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol) is started. Further, in response to the start of the stop display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the stop display of the effect symbol (the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol) is started. At this time, the effect symbols (first effect symbol to fourth effect symbol) are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that is stopped and displayed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an abnormality detection sensor (not shown) for detecting various abnormal states. Specifically, as various abnormality detection sensors, a magnetic detection sensor for detecting magnetism, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting radio waves, a vibration detection sensor for detecting vibrations, an inner frame opening sensor for detecting opening of the inner frame 3, a door A glass frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the unit 4 is included. The various abnormality detection sensors output detection signals corresponding to the abnormal states to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of various abnormal states.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control circuit 200, an effect control circuit 300, a payout control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 600 that supplies power (electric power) to the control circuits 200, 300, 400, and the like. And.
Each of the control circuits 200, 300, and 400 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores a program related to the progress of the game and data necessary for the progress of the game, and a CPU that is stored in the ROM. And a RAM (Random Access Memory) serving as a temporary storage area used for proceeding with processing based on a program. The main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300, and the payout control circuit 400 are each mounted on separate boards.

The main control circuit 200 includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, an input port 240, an output port 250, a frequency generation circuit 260, and a hard random number generation circuit 270.
The input port 240 includes a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input port 0, input port 1, input port 2, and input port 3).
A detection signal from each magnetic detection sensor 112, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch, and the like are input to the input port 0.
The input port 1 has a detection signal from the big winning ball detection sensor 103, a detection signal from the prize winning ball detection sensor 105, a detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106, and a detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107. A detection signal, a detection signal from the V winning ball detection sensor 108, a detection signal from the out ball detection sensor 109, and the like are input.
The input port 2 includes a detection signal from the special ball start ball detection sensor 101, a detection signal from the special ball start ball detection sensor 102, a detection signal from the general ball start ball detection sensor 104, and a power cut-off detection circuit. A power shutdown notice signal or the like is input.
A control command from the payout control circuit 400 is input to the input port 3.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 2) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor). In each reception storage area, 1-bit data indicating a reception state of a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is set. Specifically, each reception storage area is set to “1” when a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is input, and when a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is not input, “0” is set.

The output port 250 includes a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output port 0, output port 1, and output port 2).
The output port 0 outputs control signals to the display devices 60 to 63, the solenoids 64 to 67, and the like.
The output port 1 transmits a control command to the effect control circuit 300.
The output port 2 transmits a control command to the payout control circuit 400. Further, the output port 2 outputs external information (information relating to payout of prize balls, information relating to occurrence of an error (abnormal state), etc.) to the hall computer 700 via the payout control circuit 400 and the external terminal board 420. .

The output port 1 includes a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown).
The transmission data register outputs a control command input based on a subcommand transmission process (step S2-4), which will be described later, to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers, and can store a plurality of control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control command input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control command to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the effect control circuit 300 as serial data.

The ROM 220 stores a program related to the progress of the game and data necessary for the progress of the game. In particular, the ROM 220 stores, as data necessary for the progress of the game, a lottery table for executing various lotteries, various control commands necessary for controlling the effect control circuit 300, and the like.
The RAM 230 temporarily stores input / output data in the main control circuit 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), flags for managing lottery results and gaming states, and the like.
In particular, the RAM 230 stores start information that is acquired in response to input of detection signals from each of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101, the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102, and the universal start ball detection sensor 104. An area is provided. Here, the starting information refers to information such as various random values acquired with the input of each detection signal.
Specifically, it is possible to store start information (hereinafter referred to as “usual map start information”) acquired when the detection signal from the general start ball detection sensor 104 is input as the start information storage area. Can be stored, and the start information acquired by the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 start information") can be stored. The special figure 1 start information storage area and the start information acquired by the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102 (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2 start information”) may be stored. And possible special figure 2 starting information storage area.
In the special figure 1 start information storage area and the special figure 2 start information storage area, a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) is set as an upper limit, respectively, and start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) Can be stored.

The frequency generation circuit 260 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (in this embodiment, 12 [MHz]), and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the hard random number generation circuit 270. The hard random number generation circuit 270 generates a random number for the normal symbol lottery, a random number for the first special symbol lottery, and a random number for the second special symbol lottery. The hard random number generation circuit 270 updates the value of the loop counter one by one within a predetermined range (for example, within a range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260, so Is generated. In the present embodiment, the value of the loop counter of the hard random number generation circuit 270 is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
Note that the loop counter is set to correspond to each of the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery.

The effect control circuit 300 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input port, and an output port.
The effect control circuit 300 displays the effect image on the image display device 23 and drives (rotates) each drum 24a to 24c (each stepping motor) in the drum display device 24 based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200. The lighting of the lamps 20 and 21 and the output of the production sound from the sound generator 22 are controlled.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a program related to the progress of the effect, data necessary for the progress of the effect, and the like.
The RAM of the effect control circuit 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control circuit 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, and the like.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 determines the content of the effect to be executed based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200. Then, display control data, motor control data, lamp control data, sound control data, and the like are generated in accordance with an effect control table (effect program) corresponding to the content of the determined effect. Control signals based on the generated control data are output to the image display device 23, the drum display device 24 (each stepping motor), the lamps 20 and 21, and the sound generator 22.

The payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 based on the detection signal input from the launch volume.
Specifically, the payout control circuit 400 controls the launch operation of the game ball by the game ball launching device 430 so that the game ball is launched into the game area 30 with a strength according to the detection signal input from the launch volume. To do.
Also, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 500.
Specifically, the ball lending button 7 a transmits a ball lending operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board 410 in response to the pressing operation. When the CR unit 500 receives the ball lending operation signal, the CR unit 500 subtracts the frequency necessary for paying out a predetermined number of balls from the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the inserted prepaid card, The record of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card is updated, and a ball lending instruction signal instructing payout of a predetermined number of game balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400 via the connection board 410. Further, when the payout control circuit 400 receives the ball lending instruction signal, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 so as to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
When the prepaid cart is inserted and when the record of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card is updated, the CR unit 500 transmits a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium via the connection board 410. It transmits with respect to the display apparatus 7c. When the frequency signal is received, the frequency display device 7c displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium indicated by the frequency signal.
The return button 7 b transmits a return operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board 410 in response to the pressing operation. When receiving the return operation signal, the CR unit 500 returns (discharges) the prepaid card in which the remaining frequency of the valuable medium remains.

(About various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the winning probability of the special symbol lottery. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the relationship between the value of the time reduction counter and the value of the time reduction control flag area.
In the pachinko machine 1, the normal symbol lottery is executed with the passage of the start gate 41 by a game ball as an opportunity. When a normal symbol lottery is won, a gaming state is generated per regular drawing. In the normal game state, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, so that the game ball can enter the second start port 52.
In the present embodiment, one type of “per common figure” is set as the type of game state per common figure that occurs when the normal symbol lottery is won.

In the case of winning the “per symbol” by the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol display device 60 performs control so that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as “per symbol per symbol”.
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost, the general symbol display device 60 controls the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed as “offset symbol”.
The pachinko machine 1 can execute time-shortening control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During execution of the time-shortening control, the time for displaying the variation of the normal symbol is shortened compared to when the time-shortening control is stopped. In addition, during the execution of the time-saving control, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is extended (the number of times of opening is increased) in the gaming state as usual, compared to when the time-saving control is stopped.
This makes it easier to establish the condition for acquiring the special figure 2 starting information during execution of the time-shortening control than when the time-shorting control is stopped (the game ball enters the second starting port 52). Possibility increases).
In the case of winning the “per ordinary”, the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each opening is 0. .5 [s] or 2.0 [s]. At this time, during the execution of the short-time control, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each opening is 2.0 [s. ] Is set. On the other hand, while the short-time control is stopped, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each opening is 0.5 [s]. Set to

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed in response to the game ball entering the first start port 51, and the second ball is input in response to the game ball entering the second start port 52. A special symbol lottery is executed.
As shown in FIG. 4A, in the pachinko machine 1, as a result of the special symbol lottery (each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery), “big hit”, “small hit”, “ ”Is set.
In the first special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the “big hit” is set to 1/199, the probability of winning the “small hit” is set to 0/199, and the probability of becoming “out of” (losing) is set. 198/199.
In the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the “big hit” is set to 1/199, the probability of winning the “small hit” is set to 198/199, and the probability of becoming “out of” (losing) is set. , 0/199.
Then, when the “big hit” is won by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery), the big hit gaming state is generated. In the big hit game state, the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the big winning device 53.
In addition, when the “small hit” is won by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery), the small hit gaming state is generated. In the small hit game state, the special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, so that the game ball can enter the accessory winning device 54. Then, when the passing of the V region by the game ball that has entered the bonus game winning device 54 is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state is generated after the end of the small hit gaming state. Is done.

As shown in FIG. 4B, in the present embodiment, “big hit 1” and “big hit 2” are set as the “big hit” type (winning type selected when “big win” is won). Yes.
In this embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the selection probabilities (winning probabilities) of each winning type (various types of “big hit”) when winning “big hit” are the same. Is set.
Specifically, when “big hit” is won by special symbol lottery, the probability that “big hit 1” is selected is set to 40 [%], and the probability that “big hit 2” is selected is 60 [ %] Is set.
Further, as shown in FIG. 4C, in this embodiment, “small hit” is selected as “small hit” as the “small hit” type (winning type selected when “small hit” is won). 6 "is set.
In this embodiment, when “small hit” is won by the second special symbol lottery, the probability that “small hit 1” is selected is set to 3 [%], and “small hit 2” is selected. The probability is set to 5 [%], the probability that “3 small hits” is selected is set to 12 [%], and the probability that “4 small hits” is selected is set to 10 [%]. The probability of selecting “5 per small portion” is set to 30 [%], and the probability of selecting “6 per small portion” is set to 40 [%].
In the present embodiment, the “small hit” is not won by the first special symbol lottery. However, the configuration may be such that “small hit” can be won by the first special symbol lottery. In such a configuration, the selection probability (winning probability) of each winning type (each type of “small hit”) when “small hit” is won in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. May be the same or different from each other.

When “big hit 1” is won, the special symbol display devices 61 and 62 are controlled so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed with “large jackpot 1 symbol”. In addition, control is performed so that the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are stopped and displayed as “one jackpot symbol”.
In the case of winning the “big hit 2”, the special symbol display devices 61 and 62 control the special symbols to be stopped and displayed at the “big hit 2 symbols”. In addition, control is performed so that the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are stopped and displayed as “two jackpot symbols”.
In the present embodiment, “one jackpot symbol” and “two jackpot symbols” are identified by the combination of the first effect symbol to the third effect symbol stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop positions of the three drums 24a to 24c. It is an aspect in which information (for example, “7, 7, 7”) is aligned.

In the case of winning “1 small hit”, the special figure 2 display device 62 performs control so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “1 small hit”. In addition, control is performed so that the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are stopped and displayed at “one small hit symbol”.
When the “small hit 2” is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 performs control so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed with “two small hits”. In addition, control is performed such that the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are stopped and displayed at “two small hits symbol”.
When “3 small hits” is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 controls the special symbols to be stopped and displayed with “3 small hits”. Further, the first effect design to the fourth effect design are controlled so as to be stopped and displayed at “3 small hits”.
In the present embodiment, “one small symbol” to “three small symbols” are the same kind of combinations of the first effect symbol to the third effect symbol stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop positions of the three drums 24a to 24c. The identification information (for example, “7, 7, 7”) is aligned.
When “4 small hits” is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 controls the special symbols to be stopped and displayed with “4 small hits”. In addition, control is performed such that the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are stopped and displayed at “4 small hits”.
When “5 small hits” is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 controls the special symbols to be stopped and displayed at “5 small hits”. Further, the first effect design to the fourth effect design are controlled to be stopped and displayed at “5 small hits”.
In the case of winning “6 small hits”, the special figure 2 display device 62 performs control so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed at “6 small hits”. Further, the first effect design to the fourth effect design are controlled so as to be stopped and displayed at “6 small hits”.
In the present embodiment, “4 small hits” to “6 small hits” are at least one of the first effect symbols to the third effect symbols stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop positions of the three drums 24a to 24c. The effect symbol type is a different combination (for example, “7, bell, 7”) from the other effect symbol types.

In the case of winning the “big hit 1” or “big hit 2”, a predetermined number of round games are executed in the big hit gaming state.
In the present embodiment, when “big hit 1” or “big hit 2” is won, five [round] round games are executed during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state.
In each round game, a predetermined longest open time (29.0 [s] in the present embodiment) has passed since the special electric accessory 53a is opened, and a big prize is received during the round game. When the number of game balls entering the device 53 has reached a predetermined upper limit number (7 [balls] in the present embodiment), the process is terminated when one of the conditions is satisfied.
In addition, when “big hit 1” is won, the time reduction control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends. In this case, the time-saving control is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and is ended in response to the establishment of a predetermined time-saving ending condition.
In this embodiment, (1) winning a “big hit” by special symbol lottery, (2) detecting a V prize (passing through the V area by a game ball) during the occurrence of a small hit gaming state, (3 ) The total number of fluctuations executed during the time reduction control has reached a predetermined first time reduction number (100 [times] in the present embodiment), and (4) Special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the time reduction control. When the number of times has reached a predetermined second time reduction number (4 [times] in this embodiment), when one condition is satisfied, it is determined that the time reduction end condition is satisfied.
Here, the “total number of fluctuations” means the number of special symbol notification display (variation display and stop display) based on the first special symbol lottery, and the special symbol notification display (variation display and display based on the second special symbol lottery). This is the sum of the number of stop indications).
“Special figure 2 fluctuation count” means the number of special symbol notification display (variation display and stop display) based on the second special symbol lottery.
On the other hand, when winning the “big hit 2” by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) executed during the execution of the hourly control, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, Executed. In this case, the time-saving control is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and is ended in response to the establishment of the above time-saving ending condition.
On the other hand, when winning the “big hit 2” by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) executed during the stoppage of the hourly control, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, Not executed.

The main control circuit 200 includes a first time reduction counter and a second time reduction counter.
The first time-short counter is the total number of changes executed during the time-shortening control (the number of special symbol notification display based on the first special symbol lottery and the number of special symbol notification display based on the second special symbol lottery Count).
Specifically, at the start of the time reduction control, a predetermined first time reduction number (100 [times] in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the first time reduction counter. Then, in response to the start of the time reduction control, counting (subtraction) of the total number of fluctuations by the first time reduction counter is started. At this time, the value of the first time reduction counter is updated at the end of the stop display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol).
The second time reduction counter counts the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of special symbol notification displays based on the second special symbol lottery) executed during the time reduction control.
Specifically, at the start of the time reduction control, a predetermined second time reduction number (4 [times] in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the second time reduction counter. Then, in response to the start of the time reduction control, counting (subtraction) of the special figure 2 fluctuation count by the second time reduction counter is started. At this time, the value of the second time reduction counter is updated at the end of the stop display of the second special symbol.
The RAM 230 is provided with a time reduction control flag area.
At the start of time reduction control, “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area. Also, “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area when the time reduction control ends (stops). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, when the value of the time reduction control counter (the first time reduction control counter or the second time reduction control counter) becomes “0”, “0” is displayed in the time reduction control flag area. Is set.

When winning from “small hit 1” to “small hit 6”, the player is in the small hit game state, and a predetermined number of hit games (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) are executed.
Each small hit game is that the longest open time (5.0 [s] in the present embodiment) that has been set since the special electric accessory 54a is opened, and that the small hit game is in progress. The number of game balls that have entered the prize winning device 54 at has reached a predetermined upper limit number (7 [balls] in the present embodiment).

In the present embodiment, a V winning game and a V non winning game are set as the types of the small hit games.
The “V winning game” is a type of a small hit game in which a V ball can be passed (easy) by a game ball that has entered the prize winning device 54 during execution of the small hit game. Specifically, in the V winning game, the special electric accessory 54a is displaced to the open state during the period in which the distribution means of the accessory winning device 54 is displaced to the V passing state. As a result, the game balls that have entered the prize winning device 54 during the execution of the V winning game are distributed to the V area by the distributing means and pass through the V area.
The “V prize-impossible game” is a type of a small hit game in which it is impossible (difficult) to pass through the V area by a game ball that has entered the prize winning device 54 during execution of the small hit game. . Specifically, in a game in which V prize cannot be awarded, the special electric accessory 54a is displaced to the open state during the period in which the distribution means of the accessory winning device 54 is displaced to the non-V passing state. As a result, game balls that have entered the prize winning device 54 during the execution of a game in which no V prize can be won are distributed to the discharge area by the distribution means and do not pass through the V area.
In the case of winning from “small hit 1” to “small hit 3”, the small win game executed during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state includes a V winning game. In the present embodiment, when “1” per “small hit” to “3 per small” is won, 1 [time] V winning game is executed during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state.
In the case of winning from “small winning 4” to “small winning 6”, the small winning game executed during the occurrence of the small winning gaming state does not include the V winning game. In the present embodiment, when “Small Bonus 4” to “Small Bonus 6” is won, 1 [time] V non-winning game is executed during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state.

When the passing of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state is generated after the end of the small hit gaming state.
In the case of winning the small hit game state, if the passing of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state, in the big hit game state that occurs after the end of the small hit game state, 15 [times] round games are executed.
When winning the “small hit 2” and the passing of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, in the big hit gaming state that occurs after the end of the small hit gaming state, 10 [times] round games are executed.
When winning the “small hit 3” and the passing of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, in the big hit gaming state that occurs after the end of the small hit gaming state, 5 [times] round games are executed.
When winning the “small hit 4” and passing the V region by a game ball during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, in the big hit gaming state that occurs after the end of the small hit gaming state, 15 [times] round games are executed.
In the case of winning the small hit game state, if the passing of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state, in the big hit game state that occurs after the end of the small hit game state, 10 [times] round games are executed.
In the case of winning the “small hit 6”, when the passing of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, in the big hit gaming state that occurs after the end of the small hit gaming state, 5 [times] round games are executed.
As described above, each round game includes a predetermined longest opening time (29.0 [s] in the present embodiment) after the special electric accessory 53a is opened, and the round When the number of game balls entered into the big prize device 53 during the game has reached a predetermined upper limit (7 [balls] in the present embodiment), the process is terminated when one of the conditions is satisfied.
In addition, when winning from “small hit 1” to “small hit 6” and passing of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, after the end of the small hit gaming state Time reduction control is executed after the end of the generated jackpot gaming state. In this case, the time-saving control is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and is ended in response to the establishment of the above time-saving ending condition.

(About control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 and control commands transmitted / received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 will be described.
The main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 are connected to each other via a serial communication harness. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300, and communication from the effect control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 200 is performed. Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 is composed of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of the control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the contents of the control command. Yes.
Then, the main control circuit 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control circuit 300 by serial communication. In the effect control circuit 300, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, as control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300, a symbol type designation command, a first variation pattern designation command, a second variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game state designation Command, hold number designation command, opening designation command, round start designation command, round end designation command, ending designation command, V winning designation command, prefetch designation command, out designation command, right-handed notification start designation command, right-handed notice termination designation Command, short time control start designation command, short time control end designation command, continuous channel period start designation command, continuous channel period end designation command, first short time number designation command, second short time number designation command, first special variation number designation command, Second special variation count Constant command, and the like are set.
The symbol type designation command is a command for designating a special symbol stop symbol type (a lottery result of special symbol lottery). The symbol type designation command indicates that the special symbol stop symbol type is “out of symbol”, “big hit p symbol” (one of “one jackpot symbol” or “two jackpot symbols”) or “small bonus q symbol”. (One of “one small symbol” to “six small symbols”) is designated. The symbol type designation command is transmitted when the special symbol variable display is started. In the present embodiment, symbols corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set as the symbol type designation command.

The first variation pattern designation command and the second variation pattern designation command are commands for designating the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the first variation pattern designation command and the second variation pattern designation command each designate a variation pattern (variation time) associated with the variation pattern number by designating the variation pattern number. .
The first variation pattern designation command designates the variation pattern of the first half period (hereinafter referred to as “first variation pattern”) in the variation display of the effect symbol.
In the present embodiment, m (plural) types of patterns are set as the first variation pattern, which are associated with different variation times. The first variation pattern designation command designates one of m types of first variation patterns.
The second variation pattern designation command designates a variation pattern of the latter half period (hereinafter referred to as “second variation pattern”) in the variation display of the effect symbols z1 and z2.
In the present embodiment, n (plural) types of patterns are set as the second variation pattern, which are associated with different variation times. The second variation pattern designation command designates one of the n types of second variation patterns.
The first variation pattern designation command and the second variation pattern designation command are transmitted at the start of variation display of the special symbol.

The stop designation command is a command for designating a special symbol stop display. The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol stop display. Stop designation commands are set corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
The “game state offset value” is information for designating a game state. In the present embodiment, as the gaming state offset value, for each combination of the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the jackpot after rotation counter Corresponding numerical value is set.
The gaming state designation command designates one gaming state offset value. The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on or when a special game phase to be described later is changed.

The hold number designation command is a command for designating the hold number. In the present embodiment, the number-of-holds designation command designates that the number of holds (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) has increased by “1”, the hold number has decreased by “1”, the hold number, etc. .
Here, the “special figure 1 hold number” means the number of the notice display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device 61 being held. The “special figure 2 hold number” refers to the number of the second special symbol notification display (fluctuation display and stop display) held on the special figure 2 display device 62.
The number-of-holds designation command is transmitted when power is turned on, when starting information is stored, when a special symbol variation display is started, or the like. In the present embodiment, commands corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set as the hold number designation commands.

The opening designation command is a command for designating the start of an opening period (opening period in a jackpot gaming state or opening period in a small hit gaming state). The opening designation command is the type of the jackpot gaming state to be started (one of “one bonus per jackpot” to “6 bonus jackpots per jackpot”, “one jackpot” and “two jackpots”) or the jackpot game to be started Specify the status type (one of “1 per small” to “6 per small”). The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period.
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round game or the start of a small hit game. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a round game or at the start of a small hit game.
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of the round game or the end of the small hit game. The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round game or at the end of the small hit game.
The ending designation command is a command for designating the start of an ending period (an ending period in a jackpot gaming state or an ending period in a jackpot gaming state). The ending designation command is transmitted at the start of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command for designating passing of the V area (V winning) by the game ball. The V winning designation command is transmitted when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the V area.

The prefetch designation command is a command for designating a special symbol stop symbol type. The pre-reading designation command has a special symbol stop symbol type of “out of symbol”, “big hit p symbol” (one of “big hit one symbol” and “two big hit symbols”) or “small hit q symbol” ( One of “one small symbol” to “six small symbols” is designated. In the present embodiment, prefetch designation commands corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set.
The out designation command is a command for designating the entry (discharge) of game balls into the out mouths 58 and 59. The out designation command is transmitted in response to an input of a detection signal from the out ball detection sensor 109.
The right-handed notification start designation command is a command for designating the start of right-handed notification. The right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of right-handed notification.
The right-handed notification end designation command is a command for designating the end of right-handed notification. The right-handed notification end designation command is transmitted at the end of the right-handed notification.
The short time control start designation command is a command for designating the start of short time control. The time reduction control start designation command is transmitted at the start of time reduction control.
The short time control end designation command is a command for designating the end of the short time control. The time reduction control end designation command is transmitted when the time reduction control ends.
The continuous channel period start designation command is a command for designating the start of the continuous channel period. The continuous channel period start designation command is transmitted at the start of the continuous channel period.
The continuous channel period end designation command is a command for designating the end of the continuous channel period. The continuous channel period end designation command is transmitted at the end of the continuous channel period.
The first time reduction number designation command is a command for designating a value of a first time reduction counter described later. The first short time designation command is transmitted at the end of the special symbol stop display, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, or the like.
The second time reduction number designation command is a command for designating a value of a second time reduction counter described later. The second short time designation command is transmitted at the end of the special symbol stop display, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, or the like.
The first special variation count designation command is a command for designating a value of a first special variation counter described later. The first special variation count designation command is transmitted at the end of the special symbol stop display, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, or the like.
The second special variation count designation command is a command for designating a value of a second special variation counter described later. The second special variation number designation command is transmitted at the end of the special symbol stop display, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, or the like.

The main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is performed in both directions. Each control command transmitted / received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is composed of 1-byte data.
The main control circuit 200 transmits a control command to the payout control circuit 400 by serial communication. In the payout control circuit 400, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Also, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a control command to the main control circuit 200 by serial communication. When receiving a control command from the payout control circuit 400, the main control circuit 200 generates a serial communication reception interrupt, and stores the data of the control command in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.
In the pachinko machine 1, a prize ball number designation command or the like is set as a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the prize ball number designation command designates the payout of n (n = 2, 3, 4 or 10) prize balls. The award ball number designation command is transmitted when the award ball payout operation is executed by the payout control circuit 400.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, control commands transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200 include occurrence / release of payout errors, occurrence / release of full tank errors, occurrence / release of ball clogging errors, etc. Control commands that specify each are set. Each control command is transmitted upon detection of occurrence / release of various errors.

(Processing executed by main control circuit 200)
Next, processing executed by the main control circuit 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured in the main control circuit 200 will be described.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the hard random number generation circuit 270 receives the value of the loop counter every time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]). Is started within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within a range of 0 to 65535), and a hard random number update process is started. Then, the hard random number update process updates each of the normal symbol lottery random numbers, the first special symbol lottery jackpot random numbers, and the second special symbol lottery jackpot random numbers. The hard random number update process is executed as a function of the hard random number generation circuit 270 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on software.
When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift register of the output port 1 (output port 250) transmits a control command stored in the FIFO buffer to the effect control circuit 300. Start processing. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the output port 1 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on software.

Next, a game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control circuit 200 based on a program (software) related to the progress of the game stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, settings necessary for executing various processes are performed.
Specifically, in the initial setting process, the top address of the stack area is set in the stack pointer. Also, a vector type interrupt mode is set as the interrupt mode.
In step S1-2, a wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time is set in the timer counter. Then, measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, a RAM clear signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-4. In the RAM clear signal reading process, the RAM clear signal is read.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a ram clear switch (not shown). When power is turned on while the ram clear switch is pressed, a ram clear signal is input to the input port 240 (input port 0).
In the RAM clear signal reading process, a value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal of the input port 240 is read.

In step S1-4, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-5. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-4 is repeated.
In step S1-5, a RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the RAM access permission processing, processing necessary for permitting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the CPU 210 is allowed to access the work area of the RAM 230 (including the use-prohibited area and the stack area).
In step S1-6, based on the value read in step S1-3 (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal), it is determined whether or not the ram clear signal is input. If it is determined that it has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S1-7. If it is determined that the ram clear signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-16.

In step S1-7, it is determined whether or not power interruption occurrence information is stored in the power interruption occurrence information flag area of the RAM 230. If it is determined that the power interruption occurrence information is saved (Yes), If the process proceeds to S1-8 and it is determined that the power interruption occurrence information is not stored (No), the process proceeds to Step S1-16.
In step S1-8, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-9. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Here, the “backup information” is stored in all areas of the RAM 230 excluding the power shutdown occurrence information flag area and the checksum buffer area in the work area (work area including the use prohibited area and the stack area). Information.
In step S1-9, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-8 is normal. If it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-10. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-16.
If the checksum value calculated in step S1-8 matches the checksum value stored in the checksum buffer area, it is determined that the checksum is normal, and step S1. If the checksum value calculated in -8 does not match the checksum value stored in the checksum buffer area, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-10, a power shutdown occurrence information release process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-11. In the power cutoff occurrence information release process, the power cutoff occurrence information set in the power cutoff occurrence information flag area of the RAM 230 is released (erased).
In step S1-11, a game state return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-12. In the gaming state return process, various values are set in the work area of the RAM 230 based on the backup information, and the gaming state when the occurrence of power interruption is detected is restored.
Specifically, in the game state return process, based on the backup information, various flags (time control flag, first special variation flag, second special variation flag, V winning flag, previous jackpot symbol flag, special game phase flag, Set the values of various counters (such as a first hour-short counter, a second hour-short counter, a first special fluctuation counter, a second special fluctuation counter, a big hit rear rotation number counter, etc.) .
As a result, based on the backup information, the information stored in the RAM 230 is restored to the state when the occurrence of power shutdown is detected.
In step S1-12, a power recovery subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-13. In the power-return subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300) designating that the power supply has been restored is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do.
In step S1-13, a power supply return payout command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the power return payout command transmission process, a payout command (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400) designating that the power supply has been recovered from the power shutdown is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do.

In step S1-14, an effect return subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the production start subcommand transmission processing, the production return subcommands (phase designation command at power return, gaming state designation command, first short time number designation command, second short time number designation command, first special variation number designation command, The second special variation count designation command or the like) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the “power supply restoration phase designation command” is a control command for designating a special game phase in which the performance is restored.
In the effect return subcommand transmission process, first, the current special game phase is confirmed based on the value of the special game phase flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. Then, a power return phase designation command for designating the confirmed special game phase is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Also, a gaming state offset value is calculated based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the jackpot after rotation counter are checked to correspond to this check result. A gaming state offset value is calculated. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Further, the current value of the first time reduction counter is confirmed, and a first time reduction number designation command for designating the confirmed value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. Also, the current value of the second time reduction counter is confirmed, and a second time reduction number designation command for designating the confirmed value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. Further, the current value of the first special variation counter is confirmed, and a first special variation number designation command for designating the confirmed value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. Further, the current value of the second special variation counter is confirmed, and a second special variation number designation command for designating the confirmed value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-15, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to a main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt initial setting process, the CTC (counter / timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, the CPU 210 sets an interrupt vector register, and sets an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in the present embodiment) in the CTC.

In step S1-16, a RAM clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the RAM clear process, the RAM 230 is initialized.
Specifically, in the RAM clear process, information stored in the RAM 230 (excluding the use-prohibited area) is cleared (erased). As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 230 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Specifically, various flags (time reduction control flag, first special variation flag, second special variation flag, V prize winning flag, previous jackpot symbol flag, special game phase flag, normal game phase flag, etc.) in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 In addition to setting a predetermined initial value as a value, various predetermined counters (such as a first short-time counter, a second short-time counter, a first special variation counter, a second special variation counter, a big hit rear rotation number counter, etc.) Is set to an initial value (“0” in this embodiment).
In step S1-17, RAM clear subcommand transmission processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S1-18. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand designating that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM230.
In step S1-18, a RAM clear payout command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the RAM clear payout command transmission process, a payout command designating that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the main loop process.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-15) shown in FIG. 5 ends, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. When the main loop process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, an interrupt prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state for prohibiting interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during a period in which the interrupt disabled state is set, execution of power-off saving processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the “initial value random number” is a random number for determining an initial value and an end value of a soft random number (a winning design random number, a variation pattern random number, etc.) that is a random number generated in the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within a range from a preset initial value to an end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, a main command received from the payout control circuit 400 (a control command transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200) is analyzed, and a process corresponding to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, a subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 250 (output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission process of step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process of step S2-1, execution of the power-off saving process, timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted. Interrupt enabled period.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, soft random numbers excluding the winning design random numbers (variable pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

Next, the power-off saving process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the power-off saving process.
The power supply circuit 600 is connected to a power cutoff detection circuit (not shown). The power shutdown detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied by the power supply circuit 600, and outputs a power shutdown notice signal to the main control circuit 200 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value. .
When the CPU 210 receives the power-off notice signal, the CPU 210 starts the power-off saving process shown in FIG. 7 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. When the power saving shutdown process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the register value used during the execution of the main loop process is saved in the saving area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power-off notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the power shutdown notice signal is read from the power shutdown detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal), is the power shutdown notice signal input from the power shutdown detection circuit? If it is determined (bit check) and it is determined that the power shutdown notice signal is input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and it is determined that the power shutdown notice signal is not input. In (No), it transfers to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, an output port stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop process, output of control signals and control commands by the output port 250 (output port 0 to output port 2) is stopped. Further, the detection signal input to the input port 240 (input port 0 to input port 3) is stopped.
In step S3-5, a checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated for information stored in all areas of the work area of the RAM 230 except for the power interruption occurrence information flag area and the checksum buffer area. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum buffer area.
In step S3-6, a power interruption occurrence information setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the power shutdown occurrence information setting process, the power shutdown occurrence information is set (stored) in the power shutdown occurrence information flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-7, a RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the work area (including the use-prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times of power-off notice signal reading is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, a power-off notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the power shutdown notice signal is read from the power shutdown detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal), is the power shutdown notice signal input from the power shutdown detection circuit? If it is determined that the power-off notice signal is not input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that the power-off notice signal is input (Yes). Shifts to Step S3-8.
In step S3-11, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the return determination loop counter is newly set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is “0” (Yes), the CPU If the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S1-1) and it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register return process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S3-1 is restored. Then, after the register restoration process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The frequency generation circuit 260 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 8 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register saving process, all register values used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in the saving area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, an interrupt is permitted.
In step S4-3, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. In the dynamic port output process, a control signal is output to each of the display devices 60 to 63 (each LED).
Specifically, in the dynamic port output process, the drive information (drive signal) set in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the output port 250 (output port 0). Accordingly, the display devices 60 to 63 (each LED) are controlled to be turned on by the dynamic lighting method based on the drive signal set in the dynamic port output request buffer.

In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input process, the latest switch state is accurately acquired.
Here, an input port 0 status flag area, an input port 1 status flag area, and an input port 2 status flag area are set in the RAM 230.
The input port 0 status flag area includes a switch status storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 0. In each switch state storage area, 1-bit data (a state in which a signal is input or a state in which a signal is not input) of a signal (detection sensor) corresponding to the switch state storage area (a state in which no signal is input) “1” or “0”) is set.
Specifically, when a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is input to each switch state storage area, “1” is set, and a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is not input. Sometimes “0” is set.
In the present embodiment, the input port 0 state flag area includes the switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the radio wave detection sensor, the switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from each magnetic detection sensor, and the vibration detection sensor. Switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor, switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor, switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor, and RAM clear switch And a switch state storage area corresponding to the RAM clear signal from.

The input port 1 state flag area includes a switch state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 1. In each switch state storage area, 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating a switch state of a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is set.
Specifically, when a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is input to each switch state storage area, “1” is set, and a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is not input. Sometimes “0” is set.
In the present embodiment, the input port 1 state flag area includes a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the big winning ball detection sensor 103 and a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the accessory winning ball detection sensor 105. A switch state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106, a switch state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107, and a V winning ball detection sensor 108 A switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal and a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the out ball detection sensor 109 are configured.

The input port 2 state flag area includes a switch state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 2. In each switch state storage area, 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating a switch state of a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is set.
Specifically, when a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is input to each switch state storage area, “1” is set, and a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is not input. Sometimes “0” is set.
In the present embodiment, the input port 2 state flag area includes a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 and a switch corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102. A state storage area, a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the normal start ball detection sensor 104, and a switch state storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal from the power cutoff detection circuit. Yes.

Further, the RAM 230 is set with an input port 1 on detection flag area and an input port 2 on detection flag area.
The input port 1 ON detection flag area includes an ON state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 1. In each on-state storage area, 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating whether an on-state is detected for a signal corresponding to the on-state storage area is set.
Specifically, each on-state storage area is set to “1” when an on-state is detected for a signal corresponding to the on-state storage area, and an on-state is set for a signal corresponding to the on-state storage area. When not detected, “0” is set.
Here, the “on state” refers to a state in which the signal is not input and the signal is input.
In the present embodiment, the input port 1 on detection flag area includes an on state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the big winning ball detection sensor 103 and an on state storage corresponding to the detection signal from the accessory winning ball detection sensor 105. From the area, the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106, the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107, and the V winning ball detection sensor 108 The on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal and the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the out-sphere detection sensor 109 are configured.
In the following description, the value set (stored) in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the big winning ball detection sensor 103 is referred to as “big winning opening switch bit data”, and from the bonus winning ball detection sensor 105 The value set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the other left winning ball detection sensor 106 is the value set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of Is “left other winning opening switch bit data”, and the value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107 is “right other winning opening switch bit data”. The value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 108 is “V winning switch bit data”, and the out ball detection sensor 109 The value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal is "out switch bit data".
That is, the input port 1 on detection flag (value set in the input port 1 on detection flag area) includes the big winning opening switch bit data, the accessory switch bit data, the left other winning opening switch bit data, and the right Other winning opening switch bit data, V winning switch bit data, and out switch bit data are included.

The input port 2 on detection flag area includes an on state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 2. In each on-state storage area, 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating whether an on-state is detected for a signal corresponding to the on-state storage area is set.
Specifically, each on-state storage area is set to “1” when an on-state is detected for a signal corresponding to the on-state storage area, and an on-state is set for a signal corresponding to the on-state storage area. When not detected, “0” is set.
In the present embodiment, the input port 2 ON detection flag area corresponds to the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 and the detection signal from the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102. An on-state storage area, an on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the normal start ball detection sensor 104, and an on-state storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal from the power cutoff detection circuit. ing.
In the following description, the value set (stored) in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 is referred to as "first start port switch bit data", and the special figure 2 start ball The value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the detection sensor 102 is “second start port switch bit data”, and the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the general start ball detection sensor 104 The value set to “gate switch bit data” is referred to as “gate switch bit data”, and the value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal from the power cutoff detection circuit is referred to as “power cutoff switch bit data”.
That is, the input port 2 on detection flag (value set in the input port 2 on detection flag area) includes the first start port switch bit data, the second start port switch bit data, the gate switch bit data, the power supply And cut-off switch bit data.

In the port input process, first, a value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 0 is read. Based on the read value, the value of each switch state storage area in the input port 0 state flag area is updated.
Specifically, when “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal, “1” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal, and the reception storage corresponding to the signal is performed. When “0” is set in the area, “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal.

Next, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 1 is read. Then, based on the read value and the value set in each switch state storage area of the input port 1 state flag area (value set in the process related to the previous step S4-4), the input port 1 ON The value (each switch bit data) in each ON state storage area of the detection flag area is updated.
Specifically, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal (the value set in the previous step S4-4) and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal. Check the set value. For each signal, when “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, the signal “1” is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to, and “0” is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the signal in other cases.
Here, “other cases” means that “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and “0” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal. When “1” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and “0” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, and the switch state corresponding to the signal This is the case where “1” is set in the storage area and “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal.
Next, based on the read value (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 1), the value of each switch state storage area of the input port 1 state flag area is updated.
Specifically, when “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal, “1” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal, and the reception storage corresponding to the signal is performed. When “0” is set in the area, “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal.
Thus, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area in the previous step S4-4 is “0”, and the value set in the switch state storage area in the current step S4-4 is “0”. If it is “1”, “1” is set in the ON state storage area in this step S4-4 (ON state is detected).

Next, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 2 is read. Based on the read value and the value set in each switch state storage area of the input port 2 state flag area (the value set in the process related to the previous step S4-4), the input port 2 ON The value (switch bit data) of each on-state storage area in the detection flag area is updated.
Specifically, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal (the value set in the previous step S4-4) and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal. Check the set value. For each signal, when “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, the signal “1” is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to, and “0” is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the signal in other cases.
Here, “other cases” means that “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and “0” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal. When “1” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and “0” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, and the switch state corresponding to the signal This is the case where “1” is set in the storage area and “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal.
Next, based on the read value (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 2), the value of each switch state storage area of the input port 2 state flag area is updated.
Specifically, when “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal, “1” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal, and the reception storage corresponding to the signal is performed. When “0” is set in the area, “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal.
Thus, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area in the previous step S4-4 is “0”, and the value set in the switch state storage area in the current step S4-4 is “0”. If it is “1”, “1” is set in the ON state storage area in this step S4-4 (ON state is detected).

In step S4-5, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the timer update process, various timers are updated. Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, external information timer, error timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-6, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-7. The initial value random number update process in step S4-6 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2. Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-7, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-8. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating a winning symbol random number among soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-8, switch management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-9. In the switch management process, a process (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) corresponding to the state of each starting ball detection sensor 101, 102, 104 (whether or not an on state is detected) is executed. The switch management process will be described later.
In step S4-9, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the special game management process, the operations of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 and the operations of the special electric accessories 53a and 54a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-10, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. In the normal game management process, the operation of the general diagram display device 60 and the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S4-11, an error management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the error management process, various errors (abnormal conditions) are determined, and settings are made according to the determination results.

In step S4-12, a winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (update of various counters, etc.) according to the state of each of the detection sensors 101 to 103, 105 to 107, 109 (whether or not an on state is detected) is executed.
Specifically, in the winning opening switch process, first, it is determined whether or not the on state of the big winning ball detection sensor 103 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the special winning ball detection sensor 103 has been detected, a value obtained by adding “1” to a value set in the winning ball control counter 1 described later is newly set as the winning ball control counter. Set to 1.
In the winning opening switch process, first, it is determined whether or not the on-state of the prize winning ball detection sensor 105 is detected. If it is determined that the on-state of the prize winning ball detection sensor 105 is detected, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the prize ball control counter 1 is newly set as the prize ball control counter 1. Set to.
In the winning opening switch process, it is next determined whether or not the ON state of the other left winning ball detection sensor 106 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the other left winning ball detection sensor 106 has been detected, a value obtained by adding “1” to a value set in a winning ball control counter 2 described later is newly set as the winning ball control. Set to Counter 2.
In the winning opening switch process, it is next determined whether or not the ON state of the other right winning ball detection sensor 107 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the right other winning ball detection sensor 107 is detected, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the winning ball control counter 2 is newly set as the winning ball control counter 2. Set to.
In the winning opening switch process, it is next determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 has been detected, a value obtained by adding “1” to a value set in a prize ball control counter 3 described later is newly awarded as a prize ball. Set to control counter 3. If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 has been detected, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the external information start port counter is newly set for the external information. Set to the start counter.
In the winning opening switch process, it is next determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected, a value obtained by adding “1” to a value set in a prize ball control counter 4 described later is newly awarded as a prize ball. Set to control counter 4. If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 has been detected, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the external information starting port counter is newly added. Set to the start counter.
In the winning opening switch processing, it is next determined whether or not the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 has been detected, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the external information out switch counter is newly set as the external information out switch counter. Set to.

In step S4-13, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-12, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In the present embodiment, as the winning ball control counter, the winning ball control counter 1 that stores the number of ball playing balls that have entered the winning devices 53 and 54, and the number of ball playing balls that have entered the other winning ports 55 to 57 are shown. The stored prize ball control counter 2, the prize ball control counter 3 that stores the number of ball game balls that have entered the first start port 51, and the number of ball game balls that have entered the second start port 52 are stored. The prize ball control counter 4 is set.

In the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) of payout balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, when the payout of the prize ball by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a main command designating the completion of the payout to the main control circuit 200. Then, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) of payout balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (3 balls in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 2 [balls]) of payout balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.

In step S4-14, a launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. The launch position designation management process will be described later.
In step S4-15, external information management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer 700 is set.
Specifically, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information start port counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [sphere] in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information start port counter has reached a predetermined value, external information indicating that the number of balls entering the start ports 51 and 52 has reached a predetermined number is stored in the port of the RAM 230. Store in the output request buffer. Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [sphere] in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information start port counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information out switch counter has reached a predetermined value. When it is determined that the value of the external information out switch counter has reached a predetermined value, external information indicating that the number of detected game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 109 has reached a predetermined number is stored in the RAM 230. Store in port output request buffer. Thereafter, a predetermined value is subtracted from the value of the external information out switch counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information timer (timer counter) is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the external information timer is “1” or more, external information indicating the occurrence of an abnormal state is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S4-16, a test signal management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the test signal management process, test information (test signal) is set.
Specifically, in the test signal management process, test information indicating an internal state (a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot gaming state, an execution state of time reduction control, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-17, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the LED display setting process, drive information (drive signal) for controlling the lighting of each of the display devices 60 to 63 (each LED) is set in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-18, solenoid data setting processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S4-19. In the solenoid data setting process, drive information (drive signal) output to each solenoid 64 to 67 is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S4-19, port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer 700, the solenoids 64 to 67, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 250 (output port 0). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer 700 via the payout control circuit 400 and the external terminal board 420. Further, the solenoids 64 to 67 are driven and controlled based on the driving signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-20, a register return process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S4-1 is restored. Then, after the register restoration process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, the switch management process in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 9, first, the process proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the on-state of the general-purpose start ball detection sensor 104 has been detected. When it transfers to S5-2 and it determines with not having detected the ON state of the usual starting ball | bowl detection sensor 104 (No), it transfers to step S5-3.
Here, when “1” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the normal start ball detection sensor 104 (when the gate switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is “1”). In the case where it is determined that the ON state of the general-purpose start ball detection sensor 104 has been detected, and “0” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the general-purpose start ball detection sensor 104 (input port) When the gate switch bit data of the 2-on detection flag is “0”), it is determined that the on-state of the normal start ball detection sensor 104 is not detected.
In step S5-2, a normal start ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal start ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected (Yes), When the process proceeds to step S5-4 and it is determined that the on-state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
Here, when “1” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 (the first start port switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is “1”). ), It is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 has been detected, and "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101. If the first start port switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is “0”, it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 is not detected.
In step S5-4, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 has been detected (Yes), Then, the process proceeds to step S5-6, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.
Here, when “1” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102 (the second start port switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is “1”). ), It is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 has been detected, and "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102. If the second start port switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is “0”, it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102 is not detected.
In step S5-6, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. The special figure 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 has been detected (Yes), step S5- If it is determined that the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-9.
Here, when “1” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 (when the V winning switch bit data of the input port 1 ON detection flag is “1”). Is determined that the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 is detected, and “0” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 (input port 1 ON). If the V winning switch bit data of the detection flag is “0”), it is determined that the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 is not detected.
In step S5-8, V winning ball detection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-9. In the V winning detection process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit gaming state is occurring.
If it is determined that the small hit gaming state is occurring, “1” is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230. Also, the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit gaming state is not occurring, the process is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process.
Here, a value (special game phase) set in a special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later, is a special game phase related to the small hit game state ("pre-workpiece release state", "community release control state") , “Actual object closing effective state” or “community opening end wait state”), it is determined that a small hit gaming state is occurring, and a value corresponding to another special gaming phase. If it is, it is determined that the small hit gaming state is not occurring.

In step S5-9, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-10. If it is determined that the ON state of the out-ball detection sensor 109 has not been detected (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-9).
Here, when “1” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the out ball detection sensor 109 (when the out switch bit data of the input port 1 ON detection flag is “1”). When it is determined that the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is detected and “0” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the out ball detection sensor 109 (the input port 1 ON detection flag is out) When the switch bit data is “0”), it is determined that the ON state of the out-ball detection sensor 109 is not detected.
In step S5-10, an out-sphere detection process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-9). In the out sphere detection process, the out designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose starting ball detection process.
When the normal starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 10, first, the process proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, a normal random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the routine random number acquisition process, a winning random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is an upper limit value (in this embodiment, “1”), and it is determined that the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is not the upper limit value. In (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and when it is determined that the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5- Move to 3).
In step S6-3, a general-purpose pending number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the usual figure pending number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the usual figure pending number counter is newly set in the usual figure pending number counter.
In step S6-4, a regular random number storage process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the usual random number saving process, the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the usual figure start information storage area of the RAM 230 as the usual figure start information.

Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 start ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 11, first, the process proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-2, a holding number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the holding number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 1 holding number counter is set in the holding number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 12, first, the process proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-2, a holding number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the holding number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 2 holding number counter is set in the holding number counter address area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 13, first, the process proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special figure hold number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure hold number acquisition process, the value of the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area (special figure 1 hold number) Number or special figure 2 hold number) is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-3, a special figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special figure random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random values) such as jackpot random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers are acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether or not the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) acquired in step S9-2 is an upper limit value ("4" in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the special figure hold number is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5. If it is determined that the special figure hold number is the upper limit value (Yes), a series of processes is performed. And the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or S5-7).

In step S9-5, a special figure holding number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure hold number counter update process, the value set in the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area A value obtained by adding “1” to is newly set in the special figure holding number counter.
In step S9-6, a special figure random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storing process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as special figure start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) as a special figure start information storage area (special figure 1 start). Information storage area or special figure 2 start information storage area).
At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, various random numbers (special diagram 1 starting information) are stored in the special symbol 1 starting information storage area. If it is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, various random numbers (special figure 2 start information) are stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area.

In step S9-7, the number-of-holds designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the hold number designation command setting process, a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure hold number (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) has increased by “1” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do.
At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the number-of-holds designation command for designating that the number of special symbol 1 reservations has increased by "1" Is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure 2 hold number has increased by "1" is stored in the RAM 230. Is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S9-8, a pre-determination process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or S5-7). In the pre-determination process, based on the start information stored in the special figure start information storage area in step S9-6 (see FIG. 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) (hereinafter referred to as “pre-determination start information”), Various lottery results are determined in advance.
In the preliminary determination process, first, a special special symbol winning determination process for determining the result of the special symbol lottery (“big hit”, “small hit”, or “out”) is executed.
In the special special symbol winning determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is “big hit” based on the jackpot random number included in the preliminary determination start information and a special symbol jackpot lottery table described later. (Preliminary jackpot judgment).
Specifically, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the preliminary determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is set to “ "(Winning).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, then the jackpot included in the pre-determined start information It is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is “small hit” based on a random number and a special figure small hit lottery table to be described later (pre-small hit determination).
Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot random number value included in the pre-determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed. It is determined as “small hit” (winning).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-judgment start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is set to “off” It is determined that (Lost).

In the pre-determination process, next, a pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process for determining the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) of the special symbol is executed.
In the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined that the jackpot symbol (winning) is determined by the pre-special symbol winning determination, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined.
Specifically, the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol is determined based on a winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination start information and a jackpot symbol lottery table to be described later.
On the other hand, in the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as “small hit” (winning) by the pre-special symbol winning determination, the type of the small bonus symbol is determined.
Specifically, the type (stop symbol number) of the small hit symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination start information and a small bonus symbol lottery table to be described later.
On the other hand, in the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, if it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the pre-special symbol winning determination, “exclusion symbol” is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).

In the pre-determination process, next, a prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the prefetching designation command setting process, a prefetching designation command for designating the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) determined by the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the special game management process in step S4-9 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In the present embodiment, as a state / stage (hereinafter referred to as “special game phase”) of a game (hereinafter referred to as “special game”) executed based on a special symbol lottery, , `` Special figure changing state '', `` Special figure stop symbol display state '', `` Big prize opening before opening '', `` Large winning opening opening control state '', `` Large winning opening closed effective state '', Specified as "Large end opening wait state", "Pre-opening state", "Opening control state", "Effective closing state", and "Opening end wait state" Has been.
In the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the eleven special game phases is set.
The ROM 220 stores special game control modules corresponding to each special game phase as special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games.
In the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-9, the process first proceeds to step S10-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S10-1, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state”, a special figure change waiting process described later is started, and the “special figure change waiting state” is started. In the case of a value corresponding to, a special figure changing process to be described later is started, and in the case of a value corresponding to "special figure stop symbol display state", a special figure stopping process to be described later is started, When the value corresponds to “a state before opening the big prize opening”, a pre-opening process for a special prize opening described later is started. When the value of the winning prize opening control process is started and the value corresponds to the “Large winning opening closed effective state”, the winning opening closing effective process described later is started, and the “Large winning opening open wait state” is entered. When the value is a corresponding value, a special winning opening opening end wait process described later is performed. If it is a value corresponding to the “state before opening of an accessory”, processing for pre-release of an accessory described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the “state of opening of an accessory”, it will be described later. In the case where the bonus release control process is started and the value corresponds to the “offense effective state”, the bonus closing effective process which will be described later is started, and the value corresponding to the “open bonus end wait state” is set. In some cases, a bonus release end wait process described later is started.

Next, the special figure variation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation waiting process. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the relationship between the value of the special variation counter and the value of the special variation flag area. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the special figure 1 start information. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the special figure 2 start information.
When the special figure fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 15, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “1” or more, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not “1” or more (No). Shifts to step S11-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “1” or more (Yes), shifts to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is “1” or more, and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is “1” or more (Yes). In step S11-3, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 holding number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (Yes), the series of processing is terminated and the next processing (step S10-4) is performed. ).
In step S11-3, a special figure hold number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure hold number update process, the special figure hold number (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure hold number update process, first, the start information (special figure 1 start) stored in the start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area and the special figure 2 start information storage area) of the RAM 230. Information and special figure 2 start information) is selected as determination start information.
In this embodiment, the start determination for the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is given priority over the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area. (Special figure winning judgment, special figure stop symbol judgment, special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) are executed.
Therefore, when the special figure 2 start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is acquired (stored first). ) Is selected as the determination start information.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 start information is not stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is first acquired (stored). ) Is selected as the determination start information.
Next, the value of the special figure hold number counter (the special figure 1 hold number counter or the special figure 2 hold number counter) is updated. At this time, if the determined determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added to the special figure 1 hold. Set to number counter. On the other hand, if the determined determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly added to the special figure 2 hold number. Set to counter.

In step S11-4, a special figure winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special figure winning determination process, a special symbol lottery result (“big hit”, “small hit”, or “out”) is determined (special figure winning determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special figure jackpot lottery table in which special symbol lottery jackpot values are registered, and a special figure jackpot lottery table in which special symbol lottery jackpot values are registered.
In the special symbol winning determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is “big hit” based on the big hit random number included in the determination start information and the special figure big hit lottery table (big hit determination) To do.
Specifically, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is set to “jackpot” (Winning) is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, then the jackpot random number included in the determination start information and Then, based on the special figure small hit lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is “small hit” (small hit determination).
Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot random number value included in the determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is set to “ It is determined as “small hit” (winning).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery “ Judgment is made.

In step S11-5, a special figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, the special symbol stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is determined (special symbol stop symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the winning symbol random number and the type of jackpot symbol (“one jackpot symbol” or “two jackpot symbols”) is registered.
In addition, the ROM 220 stores a small winning symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the random symbol number and the type of the small winning symbol (“one small symbol” to “six small symbols”) is registered. Yes.
In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined that the jackpot symbol (winning) is determined by the special symbol winning symbol determination, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined.
Specifically, the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the special figure stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as “small winning” (winning) by the special symbol winning determination, the type of the small bonus symbol is determined.
Specifically, the type (stop symbol number) of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the small winning symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the special symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the special symbol winning determination, “exclusion symbol” is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).
In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-6, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command for designating the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-7, special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined (special pattern variation pattern determination).
Here, the main control circuit 200 includes a first special variation counter and a second special variation counter.
The first special variation counter includes the total number of variations (the number of special symbol notification display times based on the first special symbol lottery and the number of special symbol notification displays based on the second special symbol lottery) executed after the start of the time reduction control. ).
Specifically, the first initial value is set as the value of the first special variation counter at the start of the time reduction control. In the present embodiment, a value greater than the first time reduction number (100 [times] in the present embodiment) is defined as the first initial value. That is, 101 [times] is defined as the first initial value. Then, in response to the start of the time reduction control, counting (subtraction) of the total number of fluctuations by the first special fluctuation counter is started. At this time, the value of the first special variation counter is updated at the end of the stop display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol).
The second special fluctuation counter counts the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of special symbol notification displays based on the second special symbol lottery) executed after the start of the time-shortening control.
Specifically, the second initial value is set as the value of the second special variation counter at the start of the time-shortening control. In the present embodiment, as the second initial value, the same value as the second time reduction number (4 [times] in the present embodiment) is defined. Note that the second initial value may be configured to specify a value larger than the second time reduction number. Then, in response to the start of the time reduction control, counting (subtraction) of the special figure 2 fluctuation count by the second special fluctuation counter is started. At this time, the value of the second special variation counter is updated at the end of the stop display of the second special symbol.

Further, the RAM 230 is provided with a first special variation flag region and a second special variation flag region.
A value corresponding to the count value of the first special variation counter is set in the first special variation flag area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48A, any one value of “0”, “1”, and “2” is set in the first special variation flag area. That is, when the count value of the first special variation counter is “101” to “2”, “1” is set in the first special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the count value of the first special variation counter is “1”, “2” is set in the first special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the count value of the first special variation counter is “0”, “0” is set in the first special variation flag area. The value of the first special variation flag area is updated when the value of the first special variation counter is updated.
A value corresponding to the count value of the second special variation counter is set in the second special variation flag area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48B, any one value among “0”, “3”, and “4” is set in the second special variation flag area. That is, when the count value of the second special variation counter is “4”, “3” is set in the second special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the count value of the second special variation counter is “3” to “1”, “4” is set in the second special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the count value of the second special variation counter is “0”, “0” is set in the second special variation flag area. The value of the second special variation flag area is updated when the value of the second special variation counter is updated.

Further, the ROM 230 includes a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information. And a determination table.
In addition, as the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, when the special symbol lottery result at the time of winning corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is “big hit” and the result of the special symbol lottery is “out” A corresponding lost special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table is stored.
Further, as the winning special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table, at the time of winning corresponding to each value (each of “0”, “1” and “2” in this embodiment) that can be set in the first special fluctuation flag area. The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table is stored.
In addition, as a special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table at the time of loss, at the time of loss corresponding to each value (in this embodiment, “0”, “1”, and “2”) that can be set in the first special variation flag area The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table is stored.
In addition, as the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, the winning special figure 2 variation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific combination, and other results in which the special symbol lottery result excludes the specific combination And a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of selection corresponding to the case of.
“Specific combination” refers to a winning type in which a jackpot gaming state in which time-shortening control is started can occur. In the present embodiment, the specific combination means “V winning winning jackpot”, “Big jackpot 1” or “Big jackpot 2”.
“V winning winning jackpot” refers to a type of jackpot that allows a game ball to pass (easy) through a game ball during the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, in particular, a jackpot gaming state in which a short-time control is started. The type of small hit that can be done. In the present embodiment, “V winning winning small hits” refers to “1 small hit” to “3 small hits”.
“Other results excluding specified roles” refers to the case where “V winning winning small bonus” is won or “out” (loss).
“V prize-winning small hits” means a type of small hit that makes it impossible (difficult) to pass through the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, in particular, the big hit gaming state in which the time-shortening control is started The type of small hits that cannot occur. In the present embodiment, “V winning prize small hit” refers to “4 small hits” to “6 small hits”.
Further, as the winning special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, at the time of winning corresponding to each value (in this embodiment, “0”, “3”, and “4”) that can be set in the second special fluctuation flag area The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is stored.
In addition, as a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of loss, at the time of loss corresponding to each value (in the present embodiment, “0”, “3” and “4” respectively) that can be set in the second special fluctuation flag area The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is stored.
As shown in FIG. 49, in each special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table, the correspondence between the special figure 1 holding number and the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is registered (defined).
As shown in FIG. 50, in each special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, the correspondence between the special figure 2 holding number and the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is registered (defined).

In this embodiment, as the types of variation patterns, “normal variation (during winning)”, “normal variation (during winning)”, “confrontation waiting variation (during winning)”, and “confrontation waiting variation (during winning)” ”,“ Result announcement fluctuation (at the time of winning) ”,“ Result announcement fluctuation (at the time of winning) ”,“ Confrontation introduction fluctuation (when winning) ”,“ Confrontation introduction fluctuation (when winning) ”,“ Confrontation reach ” “Change (when winning)” and “Confrontation reach change (when lost)” are set (normative).
“Confrontation waiting fluctuation (at the time of winning)”, “Result announcement fluctuation (at the time of winning)”, “Confrontation introduction fluctuation (at the time of winning)” and “Confrontation reach fluctuation (at the time of winning)” 1st fluctuation time) is matched.
“Confrontation waiting fluctuation (at the time of loss)”, “Result announcement fluctuation (at the time of loss)”, “Confrontation introduction fluctuation (at the time of loss)”, and “Confrontation reach fluctuation (at the time of loss)” are the same fluctuations. Time (second variation time) is associated.
On the other hand, regarding the fluctuation time associated with “normal fluctuation (at the time of winning)”, the fluctuation time associated with “normal fluctuation (at the time of loss)”, the first fluctuation time, and the second fluctuation time, Different times are defined.
In addition, you may prescribe mutually the same time about 1st variation time and 2nd variation time.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), in the winning special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where "0" is set in the first special fluctuation flag area, each special figure 1 hold number ("0"). To “4”), “normal variation (during winning)” is registered (specified) as the type of variation pattern. Further, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of selection corresponding to the case where “0” is set in the first special fluctuation flag area, it corresponds to each special figure 1 holding number (“0” to “4”). “Normal fluctuation (at the time of loss)” is registered (specified) as the type of fluctuation pattern.
As a result, when “0” is set in the first special fluctuation flag area (when the count value of the first special fluctuation counter is “0”), the fluctuation pattern is changed regardless of the special figure 1 holding number. “Normal variation” is selected as the type.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49B, in the winning special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where “1” is set in the first special fluctuation flag area, As a variation pattern type corresponding to “0” to “4”), “confrontation waiting variation (during winning)” is registered (specified). Further, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of loss corresponding to the case where “1” is set in the first special fluctuation flag area, it corresponds to each special figure 1 holding number (“0” to “4”). As a type of variation pattern, “confrontation waiting variation (at the time of loss)” is registered (specified).
As a result, when “1” is set in the first special fluctuation flag area (when the count value of the first special fluctuation counter is “101” to “2”), regardless of the special figure 1 holding number. “Confrontation waiting variation” is selected as the type of variation pattern.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49C, in the winning special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where “2” is set in the first special fluctuation flag area, As a variation pattern type corresponding to “0” to “4”), “result notification variation (during winning)” is registered (defined). Further, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of selection corresponding to the case where “2” is set in the first special fluctuation flag area, it corresponds to each special figure 1 holding number (“0” to “4”). As a type of variation pattern, “result notification variation (at the time of loss)” is registered (specified).
As a result, when “2” is set in the first special fluctuation flag area (when the count value of the first special fluctuation counter is “1”), the fluctuation pattern is changed regardless of the number of the special figure 1 hold. “Result notification change” is selected as the type.

As shown in FIG. 50 (a), in the winning special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where "3" is set in the second special fluctuation flag area, each special figure 2 hold number ("0"). To “4”), “confrontation change (when winning)” is registered (specified). Further, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of selection corresponding to the case where “3” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area, it corresponds to each special figure 2 holding number (“0” to “4”). As a type of variation pattern, “confrontation introduction variation (at the time of loss)” is registered (specified).
As a result, when “3” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area (when the count value of the second special fluctuation counter is “4”), the fluctuation pattern is changed regardless of the special figure 2 holding number. “Confrontation change” is selected as the type.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50B, in the winning special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where “4” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area, each special figure 2 hold number (“ “Confrontation reach fluctuation (during winning)” is registered (specified) as the type of fluctuation pattern corresponding to “0” to “4”). Also, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of selection corresponding to the case where “4” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area, it corresponds to each special figure 2 hold number (“0” to “4”). “Confrontation reach variation (at the time of loss)” is registered (specified) as the type of variation pattern.
As a result, when “4” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area (when the count value of the second special fluctuation counter is “3” to “1”), regardless of the special figure 2 holding number. “Confrontation reach variation” is selected as the type of variation pattern.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50C, in the winning special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where “0” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area, the special figure 2 hold number is “0”. ”Or“ 1 ”as a type of variation pattern corresponding to“ result notification variation (at the time of winning) ”is registered (specified), and the special figure 2 hold number is“ 2 ”to“ 4 ” “Confrontation reach variation (at the time of winning)” is registered (specified) as the type of the corresponding variation pattern. In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of loss corresponding to the case where “0” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area, this corresponds to the case where the special figure 2 holding number is “0” or “1”. As the type of variation pattern to be registered, “result notification variation (at the time of loss)” is registered (specified), and when the special figure 2 hold number is “2” to “4”, the type of variation pattern corresponding to “confrontation” Reach fluctuation (at the time of loss) is registered (regulated).
As a result, when “0” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area (when the count value of the second special fluctuation counter is “0”), the special figure 2 holding number is “0” or “1”. ”Is selected as the result of the variation pattern, and“ Consultation Reach Variation ”is selected as the type of variation pattern when the number of special figure 2 holds is“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”. .

In the special figure variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information.
When it is determined that the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, the result of the special symbol lottery determined in step S11-4 ("big hit" or "off") and the first special variation flag area are set. The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the read special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is determined. At this time, after confirming the special figure 1 hold number, among the fluctuation pattern types registered in the read special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of fluctuation pattern corresponding to the confirmed special figure 1 hold number is: It is determined (determined) as the type of variation pattern related to the variation display of the first special symbol.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, the result of the special symbol lottery determined in step S11-4 ("special combination" or "other results excluding the specific combination") And the value set in the second special variation flag area, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the read special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is determined. At this time, after confirming the special figure 2 hold number, among the types of fluctuation patterns registered in the read special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of fluctuation pattern corresponding to the confirmed special figure 2 hold number is It is determined (determined) as the type of variation pattern related to the variation display of the second special symbol.

In step S11-8, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the variation pattern command setting process, a first variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern number (variation pattern number related to the first half period) corresponding to the type of variation pattern determined in step S11-7, and in step S11-7 A second variation pattern designation command designating a variation pattern number (variation pattern number related to the second half period) corresponding to the determined variation pattern type is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-9, a special figure variation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special figure variation time setting process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern type determined in step S11-7 (the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern number related to the first half period and the variation corresponding to the variation pattern number related to the second half period). The total time) is set in the special game timer.
In step S11-10, special figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 is set.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special figure display timer.
Next, when the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, a predetermined initial value is set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 1 display device 61. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device 61, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, a predetermined initial value is set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 2 display device 62. Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device 62, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-11, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the number-of-holds designation command setting process, a number-of-holds designation command that designates that the number of special figure holds (number of special figure 1 hold or number of special figure 2 hold) has decreased by “1” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do.
At this time, if the judgment start information is the special figure 1 start information, the pending number designation command for designating that the special figure 1 pending number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, If the judgment start information is the special figure 2 start information, a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure 2 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S11-12, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure changing state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special figure changing process.
When the special figure changing process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S12-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure display timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- 3, when it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S <b> 10-4).
In step S12-3, a special figure variation display data update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special figure fluctuation display data update processing, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure change display data update process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is newly set in the special figure display symbol counter.

In step S12-4, a special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol is terminated, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set in the special symbol display symbol counter corresponding to the special symbol 1 display device 61. To do. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device 61, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to light (stop display).
On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is terminated, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set in the special symbol display symbol counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 display device 62. . Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device 62, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit (stop display).
In step S12-5, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.

In step S12-6, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop specification command setting process, the stop specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S12-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure stop symbol display state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special figure stopping process.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S13-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a “big jackpot symbol” (“one jackpot symbol” or “two jackpot symbol”). ), The process proceeds to step S13-3, and when it is determined that the stop symbol is not the “big hit symbol” (No), the process proceeds to step S13-8.

In step S13-3, a game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-4. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230.
When it is determined that “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area. Also, “0” is set as the value of the first time reduction counter. Also, “0” is set as the value of the second time reduction counter. Further, the time-shortening control end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, the state where “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area is maintained.
In the game state update process, next, “0” is set (updated) as the value of the first special variation counter. Thereafter, a value (“0”) corresponding to the updated value of the first special variation counter (“0”) is set as the value of the first special variation flag area of the RAM 230.
In the game state update process, next, “0” is set (updated) as the value of the second special variation counter. Thereafter, a value (“0”) corresponding to the updated second special variation counter value (“0”) is set as the value of the second special variation flag area of the RAM 230.
In the game state update processing, next, a first time reduction number designation command for designating the current value of the first time reduction counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the second time reduction number specifying command for specifying the current second time reduction counter value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a first special variation count designation command for designating the current value of the first special variation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a second special variation count designation command for designating the current value of the second special variation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S13-4, special power control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the special electric combination control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the special electric combination 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a first type special power control table corresponding to each type of jackpot gaming state. Each type 1 special power control table includes an opening time, a prize opening closing time, a prize opening closing time, an ending time, the number of round games, the number of opening / closing switching corresponding to each round game, Control data (solenoid control data, control time data) corresponding to opening / closing switching is defined.
In the special power control data setting process, the first type special power control table corresponding to the type of stop symbol (big win symbol) is read, and the read first type special power control table is stored in the special power control table of the RAM 230. Set to area.
Next, “0” is set in the special electric utility continuous operation number counter.

In step S13-5, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the first type special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command for designating the type of jackpot gaming state to be started (“big hit 1” or “big hit 2”) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “pre-big prize opening state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, it is next determined whether or not “1” is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM 230. If it is determined that “1” is not set in the right-handed notification flag area (“0” is set), “1” is set in the right-hand notification start flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, if it is determined that “1” is set in the right-handed notification flag area, the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In the special game phase update process, next, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S13-8, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is “small hit symbol” (one of “one bonus symbol” to “six bonus symbols”), and the stop symbol is “small bonus symbol”. "" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-9. If it is determined that the stop symbol is not "small hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-14.

In step S13-9, a time reduction control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the time reduction control management process, time reduction control is managed.
Specifically, in the time reduction control management process, first, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, when it is determined that “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, a time reduction end determination process described later is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that “1” is not set (“0” is set) in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, the process proceeds to the next process (step S13-10).
In the time reduction end determination process, first, “1” is subtracted (updated) from the value of the first time reduction counter.
In the short time end determination process, it is next determined whether or not to stop the display of the second special symbol. When it is determined that the stop display of the second special symbol is to be ended, “1” is subtracted (updated) from the value of the second time reduction counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop display of the second special symbol is not finished (the stop display of the first special symbol is finished), the value of the second time reduction counter is not updated.
In the time reduction end determination process, it is next determined whether or not the updated value of the first time reduction counter is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the updated first time reduction counter is “0”, “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 and the time reduction control is stopped. Also, “0” is set as the value of the second time reduction counter. Further, the time-shortening control end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the updated first time reduction counter is not “0”, it is further determined whether or not the value of the updated second time reduction counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the updated second time reduction counter is “0”, “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, and the time reduction control is stopped. In addition, the short time control end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the updated first time reduction counter is not “0” and the value of the updated second time reduction counter is not “0”, the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 is displayed. The state in which “1” is set is maintained (the state in which the time reduction control is being executed is maintained).
In the short time end determination process, the first short time number designation command for designating the current first short time counter value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the second time reduction number specifying command for specifying the current second time reduction counter value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S13-10, a special variation flag management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the special fluctuation flag management process, the values of the special fluctuation flag areas (the first special fluctuation flag area and the second special fluctuation flag area) of the RAM 230 are managed.
Specifically, in the special variation flag management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the first special variation counter is “1” or more.
Then, when it is determined that the value of the first special variation counter is “1” or more, “1” is subtracted (updated) from the value of the first special variation counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first special variation counter is not “1” or more (“0”), the value of the first special variation counter is not updated.
In the special variation flag management process, it is next determined whether or not the value of the second special variation counter is “1” or more.
When it is determined that the value of the second special variation counter is “1” or more, it is further determined whether or not to stop the display of the second special symbol. If it is determined that the stop display of the second special symbol is to be terminated, “1” is subtracted (updated) from the value of the second special variation counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop display of the second special symbol is not finished (the stop display of the first special symbol is finished), the value of the second special variation counter is not updated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second special variation counter is not “1” or more (“0”), the value of the second special variation counter is not updated.

In the special variation flag management process, next, the value of the first special variation flag area of the RAM 230 is updated.
Specifically, a value (“0”, “1” or “2”) corresponding to the current value of the first special variation counter is set in the first special variation flag area.
At this time, if the current value of the first special variation counter is “101” to “2”, “1” is set in the first special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the current value of the first special variation counter is “1”, “2” is set in the first special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the current value of the first special variation counter is “0”, “0” is set in the first special variation flag area.
In the special variation flag management process, next, the value of the second special variation flag area of the RAM 230 is updated.
Specifically, a value (“0”, “3” or “4”) corresponding to the current value of the second special variation counter is set in the second special variation flag area.
At this time, if the current value of the second special variation counter is “4”, “3” is set in the second special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the current value of the second special variation counter is “3” to “1”, “4” is set in the second special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the current value of the second special variation counter is “0”, “0” is set in the second special variation flag area.
In the special variation flag management process, next, a first special variation number designation command for designating the current value of the first special variation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a second special variation count designation command for designating the current value of the second special variation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S13-11, a special power control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the special electric combination control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the special electric combination 54a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second type special power control table corresponding to each type of small hit gaming state. Each type 2 special power control table includes an opening time, an accessory closing effective time, an accessory closing time, an ending time, a number of small hit games, and bonus solenoid control data corresponding to each small hit game ( Solenoid control data, control time data), V distribution solenoid control data (solenoid control data, control time data) corresponding to each small hit game, and the like are defined.
In the special power control data setting process, the second type special power control table corresponding to the type of the stop symbol (small winning symbol) is read, and the read second type special power control table is used as the special power control of the RAM 230. Set in the table area.
Next, “0” is set in the special electric utility continuous operation number counter.

In step S13-12, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-13. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the second type special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-13, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-14. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command for designating the type of the small hit gaming state to be started (one of “1 per small hit” to “6 per small hit”) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-14, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “state before releasing an accessory” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, it is next determined whether or not “1” is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM 230. If it is determined that “1” is not set in the right-handed notification flag area (“0” is set), “1” is set in the right-hand notification start flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, if it is determined that “1” is set in the right-handed notification flag area, the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In the special game phase update process, next, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S13-15, a time reduction control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-16. In the time reduction control management process, time reduction control is managed.
Specifically, in the time reduction control management process, first, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, when it is determined that “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, a time reduction end determination process described later is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that “1” is not set (“0” is set) in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, the process proceeds to the next process (step S13-16).
In the time reduction end determination process, first, “1” is subtracted (updated) from the value of the first time reduction counter.
In the short time end determination process, it is next determined whether or not to stop the display of the second special symbol. When it is determined that the stop display of the second special symbol is to be ended, “1” is subtracted (updated) from the value of the second time reduction counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop display of the second special symbol is not finished (the stop display of the first special symbol is finished), the value of the second time reduction counter is not updated.
In the time reduction end determination process, it is next determined whether or not the updated value of the first time reduction counter is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the updated first time reduction counter is “0”, “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 and the time reduction control is stopped. Also, “0” is set as the value of the second time reduction counter. Further, the time-shortening control end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the updated first time reduction counter is not “0”, it is further determined whether or not the value of the updated second time reduction counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the updated second time reduction counter is “0”, “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, and the time reduction control is stopped. In addition, the short time control end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the updated first time reduction counter is not “0” and the value of the updated second time reduction counter is not “0”, the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 is displayed. The state in which “1” is set is maintained (the state in which the time reduction control is being executed is maintained).
In the short time end determination process, the first short time number designation command for designating the current first short time counter value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the second time reduction number specifying command for specifying the current second time reduction counter value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In the time reduction control management process, it is next determined whether or not “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as “first determination”).
If it is determined by the first determination that “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period, it is further determined whether or not “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. (Hereinafter referred to as “second determination”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the first determination that “1” is not set in the flag area during the continuous channel period (“0” is set), “0” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period. Keep the set state.
If it is determined by the second determination that “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “0” (hereinafter referred to as “0”). , “3rd determination”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the second determination that “0” is not set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 (“1” is set), “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period. Keep the set state.
If it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 holding number counter is “0”, “0” is set in the continuous flag period flag area of the RAM 230, and a continuous channel period end designation command is issued. Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not “0” (“1” or more), “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period. Maintain state.

In step S13-16, a special variation flag management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-17. In the special fluctuation flag management process, the values of the special fluctuation flag areas (the first special fluctuation flag area and the second special fluctuation flag area) of the RAM 230 are managed.
Specifically, in the special variation flag management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the first special variation counter is “1” or more.
Then, when it is determined that the value of the first special variation counter is “1” or more, “1” is subtracted (updated) from the value of the first special variation counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first special variation counter is not “1” or more (“0”), the value of the first special variation counter is not updated.
In the special variation flag management process, it is next determined whether or not the value of the second special variation counter is “1” or more.
When it is determined that the value of the second special variation counter is “1” or more, it is further determined whether or not to stop the display of the second special symbol. If it is determined that the stop display of the second special symbol is to be terminated, “1” is subtracted (updated) from the value of the second special variation counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop display of the second special symbol is not finished (the stop display of the first special symbol is finished), the value of the second special variation counter is not updated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second special variation counter is not “1” or more (“0”), the value of the second special variation counter is not updated.

In the special variation flag management process, next, the value of the first special variation flag area of the RAM 230 is updated.
Specifically, a value (“0”, “1” or “2”) corresponding to the current value of the first special variation counter is set in the first special variation flag area.
At this time, if the current value of the first special variation counter is “101” to “2”, “1” is set in the first special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the current value of the first special variation counter is “1”, “2” is set in the first special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the current value of the first special variation counter is “0”, “0” is set in the first special variation flag area.
In the special variation flag management process, next, the value of the second special variation flag area of the RAM 230 is updated.
Specifically, a value (“0”, “3” or “4”) corresponding to the current value of the second special variation counter is set in the second special variation flag area.
At this time, if the current value of the second special variation counter is “4”, “3” is set in the second special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the current value of the second special variation counter is “3” to “1”, “4” is set in the second special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the current value of the second special variation counter is “0”, “0” is set in the second special variation flag area.
In the special variation flag management process, next, a first special variation number designation command for designating the current value of the first special variation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a second special variation count designation command for designating the current value of the second special variation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S13-17, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, in the special game phase update process, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter, referred to as “first determination”).
If it is determined by the first determination that “1” is set in the right-hand notification flag area, it is further determined whether “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. (Hereinafter referred to as “second determination”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the first determination that “1” is not set in the right-hand notification flag area (“0” is set), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). To do.
If it is determined by the second determination that “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “0” (hereinafter referred to as “0”). , “3rd determination”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the second determination that “0” is not set in the time-shortening control flag area of the RAM 230 (“1” is set), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). To do.
If it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 holding number counter is “0”, “1” is set in the right-handed notification end flag area of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, if it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not “0” (“1” or more), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In the special game phase update process, next, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the big winning opening opening pre-processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening.
When the big prize opening pre-processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 18, first, the process proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S14-2, a special electric combination continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter update process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter is newly set in the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter.
In step S14-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric utility opening / closing switching frequency setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special power combination opening / closing switching number setting process, the first type special power combination control table set in the special power combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the opening / closing switching corresponding to the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter is performed. Read the number of times. Then, the read opening / closing switching frequency is set in the special electric utility switching frequency counter.
Next, “0” is set as the value of the special electric winning prize counter.
In step S14-5, a special power combination opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric role opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “big winning opening release control state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the special power combination opening / closing switching process of steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special power combination opening / closing switching process.
When the special power combination opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 19, first, the process proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power utility switching frequency counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the special power service switching frequency counter is not “0” (No). Moves to step S15-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric power switch on / off switching counter is “0” (Yes), the series of processing ends and the next processing (step S14-6) Alternatively, the process proceeds to S16-4).
In step S15-2, a special power combination control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric combination control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric combination 53a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special power control data setting process, the value of the special power role opening / closing switching counter is referred to by referring to the first type special power role control table set in the special power role control table area of the RAM 230. Read the corresponding solenoid control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data designating energization or deenergization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the special winning opening solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S15-3, a special power control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special power control time setting process, the value of the special power role switching count counter is referred to by referring to the first type special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230. Read the corresponding control time. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special power combination opening / closing switching number counter update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric utility switching frequency counter updating process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special electric power switching frequency counter is newly set in the special electric power switching frequency counter.

Next, the special winning opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening control process.
When the big prize opening opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 20, first, the process proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power combination switching frequency counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the special power switching frequency counter is not “0” (No). The process proceeds to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric power switching on / off counter is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special power combination opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 19) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power prize winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (7 [ball] in the present embodiment), and the value of the special power winning prize counter is predetermined. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning prize counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).

In step S16-5, a special winning opening opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the special winning opening opening control end process, solenoid control data for designating the energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to be closed.
In step S16-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the big prize opening closing effective time setting process, a predetermined special winning opening closing effective time (interval time) is obtained by referring to the first type special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Set to special game timer.
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, the round end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “big winning opening closed effective state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the special winning opening closing effective process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening closing effective process.
When the big winning opening closing effective process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, first, the process proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter has reached a specified value, and when it is determined that the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No ), The process proceeds to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric power continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, referring to the first type special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games specified in the first type special power control table is used as a specified value. Obtain and make a decision.
In step S17-3, a special winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the special winning opening closing time setting process, a predetermined special winning prize closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the first type special special character control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. .
In step S17-4, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “pre-big prize opening state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S17-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to the first type special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command for designating the type of jackpot gaming state to be completed (“big hit 1” or “big hit 2”) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “big winning opening free wait state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the special winning opening free weighting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening free weighting process.
When the big prize opening opening end weight process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the process proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).

In step S18-2, a game state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the gaming state setting process, when the type of the jackpot gaming state to be ended is “big jackpot 1” or “small jackpot one continuous jackpot” to “six jackpot big jackpot”, a predetermined first time reduction The number of times (in this embodiment, 100 [times]) is set in the first time reduction counter. Further, a predetermined second time reduction number (4 [times] in the present embodiment) is set in the second time reduction counter. Further, “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, the time reduction control is started. In addition, the time-saving control start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the first time reduction number designation command for designating the current value of the first time reduction counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the second time reduction number specifying command for specifying the current second time reduction counter value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when the type of the jackpot game state to be ended is “jackpot 2”, it is determined whether or not “jackpot 2” is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the execution of the time reduction control. And when it determines with having won the "big hit 2" based on the special symbol lottery performed during execution of time reduction control, predetermined | prescribed 1st time reduction number (in this embodiment, 100 [times]), Set to the first time-delay counter. Further, a predetermined second time reduction number (4 [times] in the present embodiment) is set in the second time reduction counter. Further, “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, the time reduction control is started. In addition, the time-saving control start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the first time reduction number designation command for designating the current value of the first time reduction counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the second time reduction number specifying command for specifying the current second time reduction counter value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the “big hit 2” is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the stop of the time reduction control, the state in which “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained. . As a result, the time reduction control is not started.

Next, in the game state setting process, it is determined whether or not “0” is set in the flag area during the continuous change period of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as “first determination”).
If it is determined by the first determination that “0” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period, it is further determined whether or not “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. (Hereinafter referred to as “second determination”).
If it is determined by the second determination that “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period, and the continuous channel period start designation command is Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined by the second determination that “1” is not set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 (“0” is set), “0” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period. Keep the set state.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the first determination that “0” is not set in the continuous flag period flag area (“1” is set), “0” is further set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. "Is set (hereinafter referred to as" third determination ").
If it is determined by the third determination that “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 holding number counter is “0” (hereinafter referred to as “0”). , “4th determination”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the third determination that “0” is not set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 (“1” is set), “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period. Keep the set state.
If it is determined by the fourth determination that the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is “0”, “0” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period, and the continuous channel period end designation command is Store in the command output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined by the fourth determination that the value of the special figure 2 holding number counter is not “0” (“1” or more), “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous period. Maintain state.
In the game state setting process, next, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol is set in the previous jackpot symbol flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S18-3, a special variation flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-4. In the special variation flag setting process, the value of the special variation flag region (the first special variation flag region and the second special variation flag region) of the RAM 230 is set.
In the special variation flag setting process, first, values of special variation counters (first special variation counter and second special variation counter) are set.
Specifically, when the type of the jackpot gaming state to be ended is “big jackpot 1” or “one big jackpot per jackpot” to “6 big jackpots per jackpot” (when time-short control is started), The first initial value (101 [times] in this embodiment) is set in the first special variation counter. Further, a predetermined second initial value (4 [times] in the present embodiment) is set in the second special variation counter.
On the other hand, when the type of the jackpot game state to be ended is “jackpot 2”, it is determined whether or not “jackpot 2” is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the execution of the time reduction control. Then, when it is determined that “big hit 2” is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the execution of the time reduction control (when the time reduction control is started), a predetermined first initial value (this embodiment) Then, 101 [times]) is set in the first special variation counter. Further, a predetermined second initial value (4 [times] in the present embodiment) is set in the second special variation counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that “big hit 2” is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the stop of the time reduction control (when the time reduction control is not started), the first special fluctuation counter and the second special fluctuation counter The value of is maintained at “0”.

In the special variation flag setting process, next, the value of the first special variation flag area of the RAM 230 is set (updated).
Specifically, a value (“0” or “1”) corresponding to the current value of the first special variation counter is set in the first special variation flag area.
At this time, if the current value of the first special variation counter is “101”, “1” is set in the first special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the current value of the first special variation counter is “0”, “0” is set in the first special variation flag area.
In the special variation flag setting process, next, the value of the second special variation flag area of the RAM 230 is updated.
Specifically, a value (“0” or “3”) corresponding to the current value of the second special variation counter is set in the second special variation flag area.
At this time, if the current value of the second special variation counter is “4”, “3” is set in the second special variation flag area. On the other hand, when the current value of the second special variation counter is “0”, “0” is set in the second special variation flag area.
In the special variation flag setting process, next, a first special variation count designation command for designating the current value of the first special variation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a second special variation count designation command for designating the current value of the second special variation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S18-4, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, it is next determined whether or not “0” is set in the time-shortening control flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as “first determination”).
Then, if it is determined by the first determination that “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “0”. (Hereinafter referred to as “second determination”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the first determination that “0” is not set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 (“1” is set), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). .
On the other hand, if it is determined by the second determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “0”, “1” is set in the right-hand notification notification flag area of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, if it is determined by the second determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not “0” (“1” or more), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In the special game phase update process, next, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the accessory release pre-processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the pre-release process.
When the bonus release process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 23, first, the process proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S42-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S42-2, a special power combination continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-3. In the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter update process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter is newly set in the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter. Also, “0” is set as the value of the special electric winning prize counter.
In step S42-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S42-4, an accessory release control start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-5. In the accessory release control start process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 54a to the open state is set.
Specifically, in the bonus release control start processing, the special electric combination continuous operation number counter (small hit game) is referred to by referring to the second special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230. The control time (in this embodiment, 5.0 [s]) corresponding to the value of (number of times) is read out. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
Further, referring to the second type special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230, the character solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the special power continuous operation number counter is read. Then, the read-out accessory solenoid control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. Thereby, the control of the accessory solenoid 66 based on the set accessory solenoid control data is started, and the special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined pattern.
Further, referring to the second type special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230, the V distribution corresponding to the value of the special power continuous operation number counter (the number of small hit games). Read solenoid control data. Then, the read V distribution solenoid control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the V distribution solenoid 67 based on the set V distribution solenoid control data is started, and the distribution means is controlled to the V passing state or the non-V passing state in a predetermined pattern.
In step S42-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “object release control state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the accessory release control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the accessory release control process.
When the accessory release control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 24, first, the process proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S43-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-3.
In step S43-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power prize winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (7 [ball] in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning prize counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).

In step S43-3, an accessory release control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-4. In the accessory release control end process, the accessory solenoid control data for designating the energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. Thereby, the special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the open state to the closed state.
Further, V distribution solenoid control data for designating stop of energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the distributing means is displaced to the non-V passing state.
In step S43-4, an accessory closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-5. In the accessory closing effective time setting process, referring to the second type special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230, a predetermined accessory closing effective time (3. 0 [s]) is set in the special game timer.
In step S43-5, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-6. In the round end designation command setting process, the round end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S43-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “actual object closing valid state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the accessory closing effective process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the accessory closing effective process.
When the accessory closing effective process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 25, first, the process proceeds to step S44-1.
In step S44-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S44-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S44-5.
In step S44-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter has reached a specified value, and it is determined that the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter has reached a specified value (Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S44-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric power continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S44-6.
Here, with reference to the second type special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230, the number of small hit games specified in the second type special power control table is a specified value. Is obtained and determined.

In step S44-3, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-4. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to the second type special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S44-4, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-5. In the ending designation command setting process, an ending designation command for designating the type of the small hit gaming state to be finished (one of “1 small hit” to “6 per small hit”) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S44-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “actual material release end wait state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S44-6, an accessory closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-7. In the bonus item closing time setting process, a special big prize opening closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the second type special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S44-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “state before releasing an accessory” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the accessory release end weight process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the accessory release end weight process.
When the combination release end weight process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, first, the process proceeds to step S45-1.
In step S45-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S45-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S45-2, various counter reset processes are executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-3. In various counter reset processes, an initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the prize winning ball counter.
In step S45-3, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230. If it is determined that “1” is set in the V winning flag area (Yes), If the process proceeds to step S45-4 and it is determined that “1” is not set (“0” is set) in the V winning flag area (No), the process proceeds to step S45-9.

In step S45-4, a game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230.
When it is determined that “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area. Also, “0” is set as the value of the first time reduction counter. Also, “0” is set as the value of the second time reduction counter. Further, the time-shortening control end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, the state where “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area is maintained.
In the game state update process, next, “0” is set (updated) as the value of the first special variation counter. Thereafter, a value (“0”) corresponding to the updated value of the first special variation counter (“0”) is set as the value of the first special variation flag area of the RAM 230.
In the game state update process, next, “0” is set (updated) as the value of the second special variation counter. Thereafter, a value (“0”) corresponding to the updated second special variation counter value (“0”) is set as the value of the second special variation flag area of the RAM 230.
In the game state update processing, next, a first time reduction number designation command for designating the current value of the first time reduction counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the second time reduction number specifying command for specifying the current second time reduction counter value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a first special variation count designation command for designating the current value of the first special variation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a second special variation count designation command for designating the current value of the second special variation counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S45-5, a special power control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-6. In the special electric combination control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the special electric combination 53a is set.
In the special power combination control data setting process, first, the type of the big hit gaming state that is started after the end of the small hit gaming state is selected.
At this time, when the type of the small hit gaming state to be ended is “one small hit”, the type of the big hit gaming state to be started is selected as “one big hit per small hit”, and the type of the small hit gaming state to be ended Is “small hit 2”, select “2 small hits big hit” as the type of jackpot gaming state to start, and when the small hit gaming state type to end is “3 small hits” When the type of the jackpot gaming state to be started is selected as "3 consecutive jackpots per jackpot" and the type of the jackpot gaming state to be terminated is "4 jackpots", the type of jackpot gaming state to be started is set to "small If you select "4 consecutive jackpots per hit" and the type of the small hit gaming state to end is "5 per jackpot", the type of jackpot gaming state to start is "5 consecutive hits per jackpot Select the type of small prize game state to end if "small prize 6" selects "small prize 6 continues big hit" as the type of jackpot gaming state to begin.
Next, the first type special power control table corresponding to the determined type of jackpot gaming state is read, and the read first type special power control table is set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
Next, “0” is set in the special electric utility continuous operation number counter.

In step S45-6, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-7. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the first type special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S45-7, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-8. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command for designating the type of jackpot gaming state to be started (one of “one bonus per jackpot” to “6 bonus jackpots per jackpot”) is entered in the subcommand output request buffer. Store.
In step S45-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “pre-big prize opening state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S45-9, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, in the special game phase update process, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter, referred to as “first determination”).
If it is determined by the first determination that “1” is set in the right-hand notification flag area, it is further determined whether “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. (Hereinafter referred to as “second determination”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the first determination that “1” is not set in the right-hand notification flag area (“0” is set), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). To do.
If it is determined by the second determination that “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “0” (hereinafter referred to as “0”). , “3rd determination”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the second determination that “0” is not set in the time-shortening control flag area of the RAM 230 (“1” is set), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). To do.
If it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 holding number counter is “0”, “1” is set in the right-handed notification end flag area of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, if it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not “0” (“1” or more), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In the special game phase update process, next, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as “fourth determination”).
If it is determined by the fourth determination that “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period, it is further determined whether “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. (Hereinafter referred to as “fifth determination”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the fourth determination that “1” is not set in the flag area during the continuous channel period (“0” is set), “0” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period. Keep the set state.
If it is determined by the fifth determination that “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 holding number counter is “0” (hereinafter referred to as “0”). , “6th determination”).
On the other hand, if it is determined by the fifth determination that “0” is not set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 (“1” is set), “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period. Keep the set state.
If it is determined by the sixth determination that the value of the special figure 2 holding number counter is “0”, “0” is set in the continuous flag period flag area of the RAM 230, and a continuous channel period end designation command is issued. Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined by the sixth determination that the value of the special figure 2 holding number counter is not “0” (“1” or more), “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous period. Maintain state.
In the special game phase update process, next, a game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, by checking the value of the short-time control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the counterclockwise rotation speed counter, the gaming state offset corresponding to the confirmation result Calculate the value. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal game management process in step S4-10 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
Here, in this embodiment, as the stage / stage (hereinafter referred to as “normal game phase”) of the game (hereinafter referred to as “normal game phase”) executed based on the normal symbol lottery, `` Status '', `` Normal diagram changing status '', `` Normal diagram stop symbol display status '', `` Multi-plan electric accessory release state '', `` Multi-plan electric feature release control status '', `` Multi-plan electric feature closure enabled Seven states are defined: “state” and “usually waiting state for opening the electric accessory release”.
Then, a value (ordinary game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
The ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
In the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-10, the process first proceeds to step S19-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S19-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value acquired in step S19-1 (normal game phase) is read.
In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game control module execution process, a process based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the “waiting state for normal map change”, a process for waiting for a normal map change to be described later is started, and the “current state for normal map change” is started. In the case of a value corresponding to, the process of changing the normal map described later is started, and in the case of the value corresponding to the "general map stop symbol display state", the process of stopping the normal map described later is started, When it is a value corresponding to “a state before opening an ordinary electric accessory”, a normal electric accessory opening pre-processing described later is started, and when it is a value corresponding to “an ordinary electric accessory opening control state”. When the normal electric actor release control process described later is started and the value corresponds to the “normal electric actor closing effective state”, the normal electric actor closing effective process described later is started, If the value corresponds to the `` object release end wait state '', Electric won game open end wait process is started.

Next, the process of waiting for a change in the normal map executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a normal variation waiting process.
When the normal variation waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the pending map counter is “1” or more, and when it is determined that the value of the pending map counter is “1” or more (Yes). , The process proceeds to step S20-2, and if it is determined that the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). To do.
In step S20-2, a general-purpose hold number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the general figure hold number update process, the general figure hold number is updated.
Specifically, in the normal figure reservation number update process, one start information among the general figure start information stored in the normal start information storage area of the RAM 230 is selected as determination start information.
In the present embodiment, the universal chart start information acquired (stored) first among the general chart start information stored in the universal chart start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.

In step S20-3, a normal winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal figure winning determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (normal figure winning determination).
The ROM 220 stores a common symbol winning lottery table in which the winning value of the normal symbol lottery is registered.
Then, in the usual figure winning determination process, the common figure winning determination is executed based on the winning random number included in the determination start information and the common figure winning lottery table.
Specifically, when the value of the winning random number included in the determination start information matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as “winning” (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number included in the determination start information does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be “out” (losing).

In step S20-4, a common figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the general symbol stop symbol determination process, the type (stop symbol number) of the normal symbol stop symbol is determined (normal symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the general symbol stop symbol determination process, if it is determined to be “winning” (winning) by the common symbol winning determination, “stop per symbol” is set as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). judge.
On the other hand, if it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the normal symbol winning determination, “out of symbol” is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, a normal fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal pattern variation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map variation pattern determination process, when the time reduction control is stopped, the first type (2.0 in the present embodiment) is set as the type of the general map variation pattern (variation pattern number). The type corresponding to the variation time of [s] is determined.
On the other hand, when the time-shortening control is being executed, the second type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is used as the type of the normal fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number). Determine.

In step S20-6, a normal time change time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the usual figure fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type of the usual figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is acquired. And the acquired fluctuation | variation time is set to a normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a map change display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general map display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the general map display device 60 is set.
Specifically, in the normal map display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the general map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the general symbol display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the general-purpose display device 60, the segment corresponding to the value of the general-purpose display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal state changing state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the process during normal map change executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a process during normal map change.
When the normal map changing process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 29, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the common map display timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is “0” (Yes), step S21− If it is determined that the value of the normal display timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S21-3, a normal map display data update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the general map display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the general map display device 60 is updated.
More specifically, in the normal map display data update process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value of the general map display symbol counter is newly set in the general symbol display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, a normal stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the general map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the general map display device 60 is set.
Specifically, in the general symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set in the general symbol display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the general-purpose display device 60, the segment corresponding to the value of the general-purpose display symbol counter is controlled to be lit (stop display).
In step S21-5, a normal stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the usual stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal game stop symbol display state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the routine stoppage process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing processing during a normal stoppage.
When the normal map stop process is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S22-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is “per symbol”. If it is determined that the stop symbol is not “per symbol” (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. If it is determined that the stop symbol is “per symbol” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal state waiting state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-4, normal electric control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric combination control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the ordinary electric combination 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal power control table corresponding to the execution status (during execution or stoppage) of the time reduction control. Each normal power control table includes a time before opening the normal power, a normal power close effective time, an opening end wait time, the number of opening / closing switching, and control data corresponding to each opening / closing switching (solenoid control data, control time). Data).
In the normal power combination control data setting process, the normal power role control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stoppage) of the short time control is read, and the read normal power role control table is read in the normal power role control table area of the RAM 230. Set.
Next, the number of times of opening / closing switching is read with reference to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read opening / closing switching frequency is set in the normal electric utility switching frequency counter. Also, “0” is set as the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter.

In step S22-5, a normal electric utility opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal power combination opening time setting process, a predetermined normal power combination release time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “state before the normal electric game object is released” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a process for releasing a normal electric accessory.
When the normal electric accessory release pre-processing is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S23-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S23-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S23-2, a normal power combination opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal power combination opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “ordinary electric accessory release control state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric combination opening / closing switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the normal power combination opening / closing switching process.
When the normal power combination opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 32, first, the process proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is not “0” (No). Shifts to step S24-2, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric utility opening / closing switching number counter is “0” (Yes), the series of processing is terminated and the next processing (step S23-3) is performed. Alternatively, the process proceeds to S25-4).
In step S24-2, an ordinary electronic combination control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the ordinary electric combination control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric combination 52a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal power combination control data setting process, a solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal power combination open / close switching number counter is referred to by referring to the normal power combination control table set in the normal power combination control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data designating energization or deenergization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, control of the start opening solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the ordinary electric accessory 52a is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal power combination control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal power combination control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the normal power combination open / close switching counter is referred to by referring to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230. Read time. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is newly set in the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory release control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory release control process.
When the ordinary electric accessory release control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 33, first, the process proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is not “0” (No). The process proceeds to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary power combination switching number counter is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, a normal power combination opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 32) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electronic winning prize counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (3 [ball] in the present embodiment), and the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is predetermined. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electronic winning prize counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).

In step S25-5, a normal electric utility release control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal power combination release control end process, solenoid control data for designating the energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is controlled to be closed.
In step S25-6, normal electric utility closing effective time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal power combination closing valid time setting process, a normal power combination closing effective time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power combination control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal electric accessory closing valid state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric accessory closing effective process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory closing effective process.
When the normal electric accessory closing effective process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 34, first, the process proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S26-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S26-2, an opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, a predetermined opening end waiting time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power combination control table set in the normal power combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “ordinary electric accessory release end wait state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening end weight process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory release end weight process.
When the ordinary electric accessory release end weight process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, first, the process proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S27-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S27-2, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal state waiting state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the launch position designation management process executed in step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the launch position designation management process.
When the launch position designation management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 36, first, the process proceeds to step S46-1.
In step S46-1, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the right-hand notification start flag area of the RAM 230, and when it is determined that “1” is set in the right-hand notification start flag area (Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S46-2, and if it is determined that “1” is not set (“0” is set) in the right-hand notification start flag area (No), step S46- 4
In step S46-2, right-handed notification start processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-3. In the right-handed notification start process, a display (hereinafter referred to as “right-handed notification display”) for designating (notifying) the launching of the game ball to the right path 30b is started on the launch position indicator of the state display device 63.
Also, “1” is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM 230. Further, “0” is set in the right-handed notification start flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S46-3, right-handed notification start designation command setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-4. In the right-handed notification start designation command setting process, the right-handed notification start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S46-4, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the right-handed notification end flag area of the RAM 230, and it is determined that “1” is set in the right-handed notification end flag area (Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S46-5, and when it is determined that “1” is not set (“0” is set) in the right-handed notification end flag area (No), a series of processing is performed. And the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S46-5, right-handed notification end processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-6. In the right-handed notification end processing, the right-handed notification display is ended on the launch position indicator of the state display device 63, and a display (hereinafter referred to as “left-handed notification display”) is designated (notified) for launching the game ball to the left path 30a. ”).
Also, “0” is set in the right-hand notification flag area of the RAM 230. Further, “0” is set in the right-handed notification end flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S46-6, a right-handed notification end designation command setting process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the right-handed notification end designation command setting process, the right-handed notification end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Processing executed by the effect control circuit 300)
Next, an effect control process executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 based on a program (software) stored in the ROM will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect control process.

When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 repeatedly executes a main loop process (not shown) after executing a CPU initialization process (not shown). Here, the CPU initialization process sets “0” in each flag area such as the flag area during the continuous change period of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the flag area during the time-shortening control.
In addition, a frequency generation circuit (not shown) of the effect control circuit 300 generates a timer interrupt request signal at every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in the present embodiment). Then, the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts the effect control process shown in FIG. 37 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process in response to the generation of the timer interrupt request signal.
When the effect control process is started, the process proceeds to step S32-1.
In step S32-1, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2. In the register saving process, the register value used during the execution of the main loop process is saved in the saving area of the RAM.

In step S32-2, an effect flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3. In the effect flag setting process, various effect flags are set.
In the effect flag setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a time reduction control start designation command has been received. If it is determined that the time-shortening control start designation command has been received, “1” is set in the time-shortening-controlling flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In the effect flag setting process, it is next determined whether or not a time-shortening control end designation command has been received. If it is determined that the time-shortening control end designation command has been received, “0” is set in the time-shorting-controlling flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In the effect flag setting process, it is next determined whether or not a continuous channel period start designation command has been received. If it is determined that the continuous channel period start designation command has been received, “1” is set in the continuous channel period flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In the effect flag setting process, it is next determined whether or not a continuous channel period end designation command has been received. If it is determined that the continuous channel period end designation command has been received, “0” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
Next, in the effect flag setting process, it is determined whether or not a first time reduction number designation command has been received. If it is determined that the first time reduction number designation command has been received, the value of the first time reduction counter designated by the first time reduction number designation command is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. To do.
In the effect flag setting process, it is next determined whether or not a second time reduction number designation command has been received. If it is determined that the second time reduction number designation command is received, the value of the second time reduction counter designated by the second time reduction number designation command is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. To do.
In the effect flag setting process, it is next determined whether or not a first special variation count designation command has been received. If it is determined that the first special variation number designation command has been received, the value of the first special variation counter designated by the first special variation number designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. (Remember.
In the effect flag setting process, it is next determined whether or not a second special variation count designation command has been received. If it is determined that the second special variation count designation command has been received, the value of the second special variation counter designated by the second special variation count designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. (Remember.

In step S32-3, a hold effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. In the hold effect management process, a hold effect is set.
Specifically, in the hold effect management process, first, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure 1 hold number has increased by “1” has been received.
When it is determined that the hold number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 hold number has increased by “1” is received, “1” is added to the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter. Further, in the reserved symbol display area b2, a process for starting the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 start information is executed.
In the hold effect management process, it is next determined whether or not a hold number designation command designating that the special figure 2 hold number has increased by “1” has been received.
When it is determined that the hold number designation command specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has increased by “1” is received, “1” is added to the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter. Further, in the reserved symbol display area b2, a process for starting display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 start information is executed.
In the hold effect management process, it is next determined whether or not a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure 1 hold number has decreased by “1” has been received.
If it is determined that the hold number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 hold number has decreased by “1” is received, “1” is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter. Further, in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special symbol 1 start information for which the notification display of the special symbol is started is ended, and in the reserved symbol display area b1, the hold corresponding to the start information is held. A process for starting display of the symbol h is executed.
In the hold effect management process, it is next determined whether or not a hold number designation command designating that the special figure 2 hold number has decreased by “1” has been received.
If it is determined that the hold number designation command specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has decreased by “1” is received, “1” is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter. Further, in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special symbol 2 start information for which the special symbol notification display has been started is terminated, and in the reserved symbol display area b1, the reserved symbol corresponding to the start information is reserved. A process for starting display of the symbol h is executed.

In step S32-4, pre-determination information storage processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. In the pre-determination information storage process, information specified by the prefetching designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM as hold information.
Specifically, in the prior determination information saving process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received.
And when it determines with having received the prefetch designation | designated command, a pending | holding information storage process is performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the prefetch designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, a hold information storage area capable of storing hold information is set. In addition, as a reserved information storage area, a first reserved information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (Special Figure 1 start information storage area of the RAM 230) and a second special symbol lottery (Special Figure 2 start information storage area of the RAM 230). ) Corresponding to the second hold information storage area.
In the first hold information storage area, hold information can be stored up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment). In the first hold information storage area, hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is stored. That is, each hold information stored in the first hold information storage area corresponds to each special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area.
In the second hold information storage area, hold information can be stored up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment). In the second hold information storage area, hold information corresponding to the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is stored. That is, each hold information stored in the second hold information storage area corresponds to each special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area.
Each hold information includes symbol information indicating the type of the stopped symbol.

In the hold information storage process, first, it is determined whether or not the received prefetch designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
If it is determined that the received prefetch designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the prefetch designation command (“missing symbol”, “big hit p symbol” or “small The winning q symbol ") is analyzed, and the hold information including the symbol information corresponding to the analyzed stop symbol type is generated. Then, the generated hold information is stored (saved) in the first hold information storage area.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received prefetching designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the prefetching designation command (“missing symbol”, “big hit p symbol” or “small The winning q symbol ") is analyzed, and the hold information including the symbol information corresponding to the analyzed stop symbol type is generated. Then, the generated hold information is stored (saved) in the second hold information storage area.

In step S32-5, a variable effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. The variation production management process will be described later.
In step S32-6, stop effect management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7. The stop effect management process will be described later.
In step S32-7, a small hit effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8. The small hit effect management process will be described later.
In step S32-8, a jackpot presentation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-9. The jackpot production management process will be described later.
In step S32-9, a V winning effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-10. The V winning effect management process will be described later.
In step S32-10, an extra effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-11. The additional effect management process will be described later.
In step S32-11, a launch position display management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-12. The launch position display management process will be described later.
In step S32-12, a register restoration process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S32-1 is restored. Then, after the register restoration process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, the changing effect management process executed in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation effect management process.
When the variation effect management process is executed in step S32-5, as shown in FIG. 38, the process first proceeds to step S33-1.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received. If it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-2 and the predetermined control command is changed. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control command means a symbol type designation command, a first variation pattern designation command, and a second variation pattern designation command.
Whether or not a predetermined control command has been received depends on whether or not the symbol type designation command, the first variation pattern designation command, and the second variation pattern designation command are stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Judgment based on.

In step S33-2, a variation effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the variation effect determination process, a variation effect mode (variation effect number) is determined.
Here, the content of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a continuous period and a normal period are defined as game periods.
The “continuous Chang period” is a gaming period in which a gaming state is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the continuous time period is during execution of short-time control, occurrence of jackpot gaming state, and execution of notification display (variation display or stop display) based on special figure 2 start information Among these, it is a period that satisfies at least one condition.
Specifically, the continuous Chang period is determined according to the end of the jackpot gaming state (start of the time-saving control) when the “big jackpot 1” is won by the first special symbol lottery executed while the time-saving control is stopped. Be started.
The continuous time period continues as long as the time-shortening control is being executed or the jackpot gaming state is occurring. When the time-shortening control is stopped in response to the value of the time-shortening counter (the first time-shortening counter or the second time-shortening counter) being “0”, the continuous time period is shown in FIG. When the special figure 2 starting information is not stored (the special figure 2 holding number is “0”), the process is terminated in response to the termination of the time-shortening control. When the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the “2 hour reduction counter” being “0”, “1” or more special figure 2 start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. When the special figure 2 holding number is “1” or more, the special figure 2 start in which the start determination is executed last among the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. Occurs in response to the end of information-based notification display (variation display and stop display) It is terminated in response to the end of the per gaming state.
In the effect control circuit 300, “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period of the RAM during the continuous channel period.
On the other hand, the “normal period” means a game period excluding the continuous period.

During the normal period, as a notification effect (a change effect and a stop effect), an effect is given that shows the result of the special symbol lottery (especially whether or not “big hit” is won) by the operation of the drum display device 24. The
Specifically, during the normal period, as a notification effect (variation effect and stop effect), whether or not the first effect symbol to the third effect symbol are stopped and displayed as a “hit symbol” on the drum display device 24. An effect (normal variation effect described later) is performed by turning the drums 24a to 24c.

On the other hand, during the continuous channel period, an effect is presented that shows the result of the special symbol lottery (especially whether or not the specific combination is won) by the effect image displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23.
Specifically, during the continuous channel period, battle effects are executed as notification effects (variation effects and stop effects) and small hit effects.
In the “battle effect”, on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23, an effect image in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other is displayed, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested (notified) depending on the content of the effect image. .
In the present embodiment, single battle effects and continuous battle effects are set as the types of battle effects.

The “single battle effect” is a type of battle effect in which the effect content (story) is completed in each notification effect (variation effect, stop effect, and small hit effect).
In the single battle effect, the result of the special symbol lottery (start determination) is suggested (notified) depending on the content of the single battle effect (the content of the effect image).
Specifically, in a single battle effect, when a specific role is won by a special symbol lottery, an effect image in which a teammate character wins is displayed. On the other hand, in the single battle effect, when the special role is not won by the special symbol lottery, an effect image in which the teammate character is defeated is displayed.

The “continuous battle effect” is a type of battle effect in which effect contents (story) can continue over a predetermined number of notification effects (variation effect, stop effect, and small hit effect). The continuous battle effect includes a maximum of a predetermined number of notification effects (3 [times] in the present embodiment). And in a continuous battle effect, an individual battle effect is performed as a notification effect of each time.
In the continuous battle effect, the result of the special symbol lottery (start determination) is suggested (notified) depending on the content of each individual battle effect (notification effect of each time).
Specifically, in each individual battle effect, when a specific combination is won by a special symbol lottery, an effect image with content that is advantageous to a teammate character is displayed. On the other hand, in the individual battle effects of each time, when the specific combination is not won by the special symbol lottery, an effect image with contents that are disadvantageous for the teammate character is displayed.
In the effect control circuit 300, “1” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area of the RAM during execution of the continuous battle effect.

In the variation effect determination process, first, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command is confirmed.
When the type of variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command is “normal variation” (“normal variation (during winning)” or “normal variation (during defeat)”), a normal variation effect described later Execute the decision process.
On the other hand, when the type of the variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command is “confrontation waiting variation” (“confrontation waiting variation (at the time of winning)” or “confrontation waiting variation (at the time of defeat)”), it will be described later. The confrontation waiting variation effect determination process is executed.
On the other hand, when the type of the variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command is “result announcement variation” (“result announcement variation (during winning)” or “result announcement variation (decided)”), it will be described later. A result notification variation effect determination process is executed.
On the other hand, when the type of the variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command is “confrontation introduction variation” (“confrontation introduction variation (at the time of winning)” or “confrontation introduction variation (at the time of defeat)”), it will be described later. The confrontation introduction variation effect determination process is executed.
On the other hand, when the type of the variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command is “confrontation reach variation” (“confrontation reach variation (at the time of winning)” or “confrontation reach variation (at the time of defeat)”), it will be described later. The confrontation reach variation production determination process is executed.
Here, in the present embodiment, the mode of variation effect (variation effect number) is determined based on the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command.
However, based on the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) designated by the first variation pattern designation command and the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) designated by the second variation pattern designation command, a variation effect mode is provided. A configuration may be adopted in which (variable effect number) is determined.

Next, normal variation effect determination processing will be described.
In the normal variation effect determination process, the mode (variation effect number) of the normal variation effect is determined.
The “normal variation effect” is executed as a variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol (except for the “specific special diagram 1 variation display” to be described later) that is executed while the time reduction control is stopped.
In the normal variation effect, in the drum type display device 24, an operation is performed to determine whether or not the first effect symbol to the third effect symbol are stopped and displayed as “big hit symbol” by each of the drums 24a to 24a.
In the present embodiment, the normal variation effect at the time of winning and the normal variation effect at the time of loss are defined as modes (types) of the normal variation effect.
The “normal variation effect at the time of winning” is a normal variation effect of the content in which the first effect symbol to the third effect symbol are stopped and displayed as “big hit symbol” in the drum type display device 24.
On the other hand, the “ordinary variation effect at the time of loss” is the normal content of the content that the first to third effect symbols are not stopped and displayed as “hit symbols” (stopped display as “out of symbol”) on the drum-type display device 24. It is a variable production.

The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a change effect lottery table in which correspondence between the change effect lottery random number value and the change effect mode (change effect number) is registered.
In addition, as a variation effect lottery table, a variation effect lottery table corresponding to “normal variation (during winning)” and a variation effect lottery table corresponding to “normal variation (during defeat)” are stored.
And, in the variation effect lottery table corresponding to “normal variation (at the time of winning)”, only the normal variation effect at the time of winning (the variation effect number corresponding to the normal variation effect at the time of winning) is selected as the variation effect mode (variation effect number). Is registered. In the present embodiment, in the variation effect lottery table corresponding to “normal variation (at the time of winning)”, a plurality of winning normal variation effect modes (types) with different effect contents are registered.
On the other hand, in the variation effect lottery table corresponding to “normal variation (at the time of loss)”, only the normal variation effect at the time of loss (variation effect number corresponding to the normal variation effect at the time of loss) as the variation effect mode (variation effect number). Is registered. In the present embodiment, the variation effect lottery table corresponding to “normal variation (at the time of loss)” registers a plurality of modes (types) of normal variation effects at the time of selection that differ from each other in effect content.

  In the normal variation effect determination process, first, a variation effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the variation effect lottery table corresponding to the type of variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command (“normal variation (at the time of winning)” or “normal variation (at the time of winning)”) is read. And the aspect (variation effect number) of a variation effect is determined based on the acquired variation effect lottery random number and the read variation effect lottery table.

Next, the confrontation standby variation effect determination process will be described.
In the confrontation standby variation effect determination process, the mode (variation effect number) of the confrontation standby variation effect is determined.
The “confrontation waiting variation effect” is executed as a variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol executed during the time-shortening control.
The confrontation waiting variation effect is one type of battle effect, and is an effect that prompts a game ball to enter the second start port 52. Specifically, in the confrontation standby variation effect, a confrontation standby image is displayed on the display screen 23 a of the image display device 23.
“Confrontation waiting image” is an effect image that suggests that the confrontation (match) between the ally character and the enemy character is in a standby state (or the confrontation starts by entering the game ball into the second starting port 52 It is a production image that suggests that
In the present embodiment, a confrontation waiting variation effect at the time of winning and a confrontation waiting variation effect during the selection are defined as the mode (type) of the confrontation waiting variation effect.
In the “Waiting for confrontation at the time of winning” effect, a confrontation waiting image of the content suggesting that a special symbol lottery has been won is displayed after it is suggested that the confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character is in a standby state. .
On the other hand, in the “decision confrontation waiting variation effect”, the confrontation waiting image of the content suggesting that the contest between the ally character and the enemy character is in a stand-by state and suggesting that the special symbol lottery was dismissed is displayed. Is done.

In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, as the change effect lottery table, a change effect lottery table corresponding to “confrontation waiting change (during winning)” and a change effect lottery table corresponding to “confrontation wait change (during winning)” , Is stored.
And, in the variation production lottery table corresponding to “confrontation waiting variation (at the time of winning)”, the variation production mode (variation production number) as the variation production mode (variation production number) No.) is registered.
On the other hand, the variation production lottery table corresponding to “confrontation waiting variation (at the time of defeat)” has a variation production mode (variation production number) as a variation production mode (variation production number). No.) is registered.

  In the confrontation waiting variation effect determination process, first, a variation effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the variation effect lottery table corresponding to the type of variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command (“confrontation waiting variation (during winning)” or “confrontation waiting variation (during defeat)”) is read. And the aspect (variation effect number) of a variation effect is determined based on the acquired variation effect lottery random number and the read variation effect lottery table.

Next, the result notification variation effect determination process will be described.
In the result notification variation effect determination process, the result notification variation effect mode (variation effect number) is determined.
The “result notification fluctuation effect” is executed as a fluctuation effect corresponding to the specific times special figure 1 fluctuation display and a fluctuation effects corresponding to the specific times special figure 2 fluctuation display.
The “special time special figure 1 variable display” is the first special time symbol when the time reduction control is terminated in response to the value of the first time reduction counter becoming “0” by executing the notification display of the first special symbol. This means the first special symbol variation display (the first special symbol variation display executed first after the time-shortening control (continuous-changing period) ends) next to the special symbol notification display.
The “specific special figure 2 variable display” refers to a variable display of the second special symbol based on the final special figure 2 start information described later (the variable display of the second special symbol executed during the consecutive period). .
The result notification variation effect is one type of battle effect, and is an effect suggesting the end of the continuous period. Specifically, in the result notification variation effect, the result notification image is displayed on the display screen 23 a of the image display device 23.
The “result notification image” is an effect image (or an effect image that suggests the content of the game during the continuous channel period) with a content indicating the end of the continuous channel period.
Here, the number of the jackpot gaming state that occurred during each consecutive Chang period is counted, and in the result notification image, information that indicates the number of jackpot gaming states that occurred during the consecutive Chang period is displayed. It doesn't matter.
Alternatively, the number of round games executed during each consecutive Chang period may be counted, and information indicating the number of round games executed during the consecutive Chang period may be displayed in the result notification image. .
Alternatively, the number of prize balls paid out during each consecutive Chang period (the number of prize balls won by the player) is counted, and the result notification image indicates the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive Chang period. The information to be displayed may be displayed.
In the present embodiment, a result notification change effect at the time of winning and a result notification change effect at the time of loss are defined as the mode (type) of the result notification change effect.
In the “winning result notification change effect”, after the content indicating the end of the continuous channel period is displayed, the result notification image of the content informing the continuation of the continuous channel period is displayed.
On the other hand, in the “decision result notification change effect”, after displaying the content indicating the end of the continuous channel period, the result notification image of the content informing the end of the continuous channel period is displayed.
In addition, as described above, in the “notice result change notification effect”, in the result notification image, the content of the game during the consecutive period (number of occurrences of jackpot gaming state, number of round games executed, number of winning balls acquired) Etc.) may be displayed. In the case of such a configuration, in the “result winning notification notification variation effect”, in the result notification image, the content of the game during the consecutive period (the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state, the number of round games executed, the winning ball acquired) (Number etc.) is not displayed.

In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, as a variable effect lottery table, a variable effect lottery table corresponding to “result notification change (during winning)”, and a variable effect lottery table corresponding to “result notification change (during winning)” , Is stored.
In the variation effect lottery table corresponding to “result notification variation (at the time of winning)”, as the variation effect mode (variation effect number), the winning result notification notification variation effect (the variation effect corresponding to the winning result notification variation effect) No.) is registered.
On the other hand, in the variation effect lottery table corresponding to “result notification change (at the time of loss)”, as a change effect mode (change effect number), the result notification change effect at the time of loss (change effect corresponding to the result notification change effect at the time of loss) No.) is registered.

  In the result notification variation effect determination process, first, a variation effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the variation effect lottery table corresponding to the type of variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command (“result notification variation (at the time of winning)” or “result notification variation (at the time of defeat)”) is read. And the aspect (variation effect number) of a variation effect is determined based on the acquired variation effect lottery random number and the read variation effect lottery table.

Next, the confrontation introduction variation effect determination process will be described.
In the confrontation introduction variation effect determination process, the mode (variation effect number) of the confrontation introduction variation effect (individual battle effect or single battle effect) is determined.
“Confrontation introduction variation effect” is executed as a variation effect corresponding to the first special figure 2 variation display.
“First special figure 2 fluctuation display” means a fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is executed first after the start of the time-shortening control.
The confrontation introduction variation effect is a type of battle effect, and suggests the start of the battle effect and also indicates (notifies) the result of the special symbol lottery (start determination).
Specifically, in the confrontation introduction variation effect, a confrontation introduction image is displayed on the display screen 23 a of the image display device 23.
“Confrontation introduction image” is an effect image of the content that the confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character is started after the display suggesting that the confrontation (match) between the ally character and the enemy character is started. It has become.

In the present embodiment, a confrontation introduction variation effect (single battle effect) and a confrontation reach variation effect (single battle effect) to be described later are defined as modes (types) of the single battle effect.
Moreover, as an aspect (type) of individual battle effects, a confrontation introduction variation effect (individual battle effect) and a confrontation reach variation effect (individual battle effect) described later are defined.
In addition, as a mode (type) of a confrontation introduction variation effect (single battle effect), a confrontation introduction variation effect (single battle effect) at the time of winning and a confrontation introduction variation effect (single battle effect) at the time of winning are defined.
Furthermore, as a mode (type) of a confrontation introduction variation effect (individual battle effect), a confrontation introduction variation effect (individual battle effect) at the time of winning and a confrontation introduction variation effect (individual battle effect) at the time of winning are defined.
In “Winning Confrontation Introduction Fluctuation Production (Single Battle Production)”, a display suggesting that a confrontation between an ally character and an enemy character will be displayed, and then a confrontation introduction image in which the ally character wins is displayed. .
On the other hand, in the “decision confrontation introduction variation production (single battle production)”, a confrontation introduction image in which the teammate character is defeated is displayed after a display suggesting that the confrontation between the teammate character and the enemy character is started. Is done.
In the “winning confrontation introduction variation effect (individual battle effect)”, after the display suggesting that the confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character is started, the content that the ally character is advantageous (in this embodiment) , An effect image of a successful attack on an enemy character by an ally character) is displayed.
On the other hand, in the “decision confrontation introduction variation production (individual battle production)”, a display suggesting that the confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character will be started, and then the content that the ally character is disadvantaged (this implementation) In the form, the effect image of the content that the attack on the enemy character by the teammate character fails) is displayed.

In the confrontation introduction variation effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 (whether or not the continuous battle effect is being executed). .
When it is determined that “1” is not set (“0” is set) in the continuous battle effect flag area (when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed), A one-shot battle effect mode determination process is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that “1” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area (when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed), a first individual battle effect mode determination process described later is executed. To do.

Next, the 1st single battle effect aspect determination process performed in the confrontation introduction variation effect determination process is demonstrated.
In the first single battle effect mode determination process, first, the type of enemy character to be the opponent in the single battle effect (confrontation introduction variation effect) is determined.
In this embodiment, six types “enemy character A” to “enemy character F” are set as the types of enemy characters.
The ROM of the production control circuit 300 stores an enemy character lottery table in which the correspondence between the enemy character lottery random value and the type of enemy character (“enemy character A” to “enemy character F”) is registered. Yes.
In addition, as the enemy character lottery table, there are stored a winning enemy character lottery table corresponding to a case where a specific combination is won, and a defeating enemy character lottery table corresponding to a case where a specific combination is not won.
In addition, as the enemy character lottery table at the time of winning, each of the combinations of the types of ally characters ("Friend Character A" to "Friend Character C") described later and the number of round games that can be executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state The winning enemy character lottery table corresponding to is stored.
In addition, the enemy character lottery table at the time of defeat corresponding to each kind of teammate character ("friend character A" to "friend character C") is stored as the enemy character lottery table at the time of defeat.
In a single battle production (confrontation introduction variation production or confrontation variation production), a combination of a preselected ally character type and an enemy character type determined as an opponent (hereinafter referred to as “competition combination”) ) Suggests an expected value for winning the specific combination and the number of round games that can be executed when the specific combination is won.
The “expected value” refers to the degree of possibility that a specific combination will be won when the battle combination is determined (displayed).

When determining the type of enemy character, first, an enemy character lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, based on the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) designated by the symbol type designation command, it is determined whether or not the specific combination is won.
If it is determined that the specific role is won, the teammate character selection information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 specifies the friendly character type specified by the symbol type specification command. The number of round games corresponding to is checked, and the winning enemy character lottery table corresponding to the check result is read. Then, based on the acquired enemy character lottery random number and the winning enemy character lottery table, the type of enemy character is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific combination is not won, the type of the friendly character specified by the friendly character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is confirmed, and the result corresponds to the confirmation result. Read the enemy character lottery table at the time of loss. Then, the type of enemy character is determined based on the acquired enemy character lottery random number and the enemy character lottery table at the time of defeat.

In the first single battle effect mode determination process, next, the type of appearance pattern of the enemy character in the single battle effect (confrontation introduction variation effect) is determined.
In this embodiment, a plurality of types of appearance patterns having different expected values for winning a specific role are set as appearance patterns corresponding to each type of enemy character (each of “enemy character A” to “enemy character F”). Yes.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores an appearance pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the appearance pattern lottery random number and the type of the appearance pattern is registered.
In addition, as the appearance pattern lottery table, there are stored a winning appearance pattern lottery table corresponding to a case where a specific combination is won, and a lost selection appearance pattern lottery table corresponding to a case where a specific combination is not won.
In addition, a winning appearance pattern lottery table corresponding to each type of enemy character is stored as the winning appearance pattern lottery table.
In addition, a loss appearance pattern lottery table corresponding to each type of enemy character is stored as the loss appearance pattern lottery table.

When determining the type of appearance pattern of an enemy character, first, an appearance pattern lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, based on the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) designated by the symbol type designation command, it is determined whether or not the specific combination is won.
When it is determined that the specific combination is won, the type of the determined enemy character is confirmed, and a winning appearance pattern lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the type of the appearance pattern is determined based on the acquired appearance pattern lottery random number and the winning appearance pattern lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific combination is not won, the type of the determined enemy character is confirmed, and the appearance pattern lottery table at the time of loss corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the type of the appearance pattern is determined based on the acquired appearance pattern lottery random number and the appearance pattern lottery table at the time of defeat.

In the first single battle effect mode determination process, next, the type of the killing technique of the teammate character in the single battle effect (confrontation introduction variation effect) is determined.
In the present embodiment, multiple types of special moves with different expected values for winning a specific role are set as the special moves corresponding to each type of ally character (each of “friend character A” to “friend character C”). Yes.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a special technique lottery table in which correspondence between the special technique lottery random number and the special technique type is registered.
In addition, as a special move lottery table, a winning special move lottery table corresponding to a case where a specific combination is won and a lost special move lottery table corresponding to a case where a specific combination is not won are stored.
In addition, as the winning special technique lottery table, the winning special technique lottery table corresponding to each battle combination is stored.
In addition, a lost-kill deadly technique lottery table corresponding to each battle combination is stored as a lost-kill deadly technique lottery table.

When determining the type of a special move of a teammate character, first, a special move lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, based on the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) designated by the symbol type designation command, it is determined whether or not the specific combination is won.
If it is determined that the specific role is won, the friendly character type specified by the friendly character selection information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the determined enemy character type, Is read, and the winning special technique lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the acquired special move lottery random number and the special move lottery table at the time of winning, the type of the special move is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific role is not won, the friendly character type specified by the friendly character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the determined enemy character type Are read, and the deadly killing technique lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the type of the special move is determined based on the acquired special move lottery random number and the special move lottery table at the time of loss.

In the first single battle effect mode determination process, next, the mode of change effect (change effect number) is determined.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a first confrontation introduction variation effect lottery table corresponding to a confrontation introduction variation effect (single battle effect) as a variation effect lottery table.
In addition, as the first confrontation introduction variation effect lottery table, the type of the second variation pattern (“confrontation introduction variation (at the time of winning)” or “confrontation introduction variation (at the time of defeat)”), the type of ally character, and the enemy character's A first confrontation introduction variation effect lottery table corresponding to each combination of type and type of appearance pattern is stored.
And each 1st confrontation introduction variation production lottery table corresponds to the combination of the kind of friend character corresponding to the said 1st confrontation introduction variation production lottery table, the kind of enemy character, and the kind of appearance pattern. The variation production number related to the battle production (confrontation introduction variation production) is registered.
Also, in the first confrontation introduction variation effect lottery table corresponding to “confrontation introduction variation (at the time of winning)”, “confrontation introduction variation effect (single battle effect)” at the time of winning is selected as the variation effect mode (variation effect number). Only the corresponding variable production number is registered.
On the other hand, in the first confrontation introduction variation effect lottery table corresponding to “confrontation introduction variation (at the time of defeat)”, as the variation effect mode (variation effect number), “the contest introduction variation variation effect (single battle effect)” Only the corresponding variable production number is registered.

  When determining the mode of variation effect, first, the variation effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of the second variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command (“confrontation introduction variation (during winning)” or “confrontation introduction variation (during defeat)” is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Confirm the friendly character type specified by the selected friendly character selection information, the determined enemy character type, and the determined appearance pattern type, and the first confrontation variation variation lottery corresponding to the confirmation result Then, the mode of variation effect (variation effect number) is determined based on the acquired random effect lottery random number and the first confrontation introduction variable effect lottery table.

Next, the first individual battle effect mode determination process executed in the confrontation introduction variation effect determination process will be described.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores the second confrontation introduction variation effect lottery table corresponding to the confrontation introduction variation effect (individual battle effect) as the variation effect lottery table.
In addition, as the second confrontation introduction variation effect lottery table, the type of the second variation pattern (“confrontation introduction variation (at the time of winning)” or “confrontation introduction variation (at the time of defeat)”) and the mode of the continuous battle effect (continuous battle effect) Number) and a second confrontation introduction variation effect lottery table corresponding to each of the combinations.
And in the 2nd confrontation introduction variation production lottery table corresponding to each continuous battle production number, the friend character which relates to the kind corresponding to the continuous battle production number, and the opposing character which relates to the type corresponding to the continuous battle production number, The variation production number related to the individual battle production (confrontation introduction variation production) in which, is played is registered.
Further, in the second confrontation introduction variation effect lottery table corresponding to “confrontation introduction variation (at the time of winning)”, “confrontation introduction variation effect (individual battle effect)” at the time of winning is selected as the variation effect mode (variation effect number). Only the corresponding variable production number is registered.
On the other hand, in the second confrontation introduction variation effect lottery table corresponding to “confrontation introduction variation (at the time of defeat)”, as the variation effect mode (variation effect number), “contest introduction change variation effect (individual battle effect)” Only the corresponding variable production number is registered.

  In the first individual battle effect mode determination process, first, a variable effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the type of the second variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command (“confrontation introduction variation (during winning)” or “confrontation introduction variation (during defeat)”, and the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in step S36-13. The second battle introduction variation effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out, and the acquired variation effect lottery random number and the second battle introduction variation effect lottery table are read out. Based on the above, the mode of variation effect (variation effect number) is determined.

Next, the confrontation reach variation effect determination process will be described.
In the confrontation reach variation effect determination process, the mode (variation effect number) of the confrontation reach variation effect (individual battle effect or single battle effect) is determined.
“Confrontation reach variation effect” is the second special symbol variation display executed during the short-time control, except for “first special map 2 variation display” and “specific special graph 2 variation display”. It is executed as a variation effect corresponding to the variation display of two special symbols.
The confrontation reach variation effect is a type of battle effect, and is an effect that suggests (notifies) the result of a special symbol lottery (start determination).
Specifically, in the confrontation reach variation effect, the confrontation reach image is displayed on the display screen 23 a of the image display device 23.
The “confrontation reach image” is an effect image of content in which a friendly character and an enemy character confront (match).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the confrontation reach variation effect (single battle effect) is defined as the mode (type) of the single battle effect, and the confrontation reach variation effect (individual battle) is defined as the mode (type) of the individual battle effect. Production).
Further, as a mode (type) of the confrontation reach variation effect (single battle effect), a confrontation reach variation effect (single battle effect) at the time of winning and a confrontation reach variation effect (single battle effect) at the time of winning are defined.
Furthermore, as a mode (type) of the confrontation reach variation effect (individual battle effect), a confrontation reach variation effect (individual battle effect) at the time of winning and a confrontation reach variation effect (individual battle effect) at the time of winning are defined.
In “winning confrontation reach variation effect (single battle effect)”, a confrontation reach image in which a teammate character wins is displayed.
On the other hand, in the “decision confrontation reach variation effect (single battle effect)”, a confrontation reach image in which the ally character is defeated is displayed.
In the “winning confrontation reach variation effect (individual battle effect)”, an effect image of content that is advantageous to the teammate character is displayed.
On the other hand, in the “decision confrontation reach variation effect (individual battle effect)”, an effect image having contents that are disadvantageous for the teammate character is displayed.

In the confrontation reach variation effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 (whether or not the continuous battle effect is being executed). .
When it is determined that “1” is not set (“0” is set) in the continuous battle effect flag area (when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed), 2 Single-shot battle production mode determination processing is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that “1” is set in the continuous battle effect flag region (when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed), a second individual battle effect mode determination process described later is executed. To do.

Next, the second single battle effect mode determination process executed in the confrontation reach variation effect determination process will be described.
In the second single battle effect production mode determination process, first, the type of enemy character that is the opponent in the single battle production (confrontation reach variation production) is decided.
For this, first, an enemy character lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, based on the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) designated by the symbol type designation command, it is determined whether or not the specific combination is won.
If it is determined that the specific role is won, the teammate character selection information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 specifies the friendly character type specified by the symbol type specification command. The number of round games corresponding to is checked, and the winning enemy character lottery table corresponding to the check result is read. Then, based on the acquired enemy character lottery random number and the winning enemy character lottery table, the type of enemy character is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific combination is not won, the type of the friendly character specified by the friendly character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is confirmed, and the result corresponds to the confirmation result. Read the enemy character lottery table at the time of loss. Then, the type of enemy character is determined based on the acquired enemy character lottery random number and the enemy character lottery table at the time of defeat.

In the second single battle production effect determination process, next, the type of appearance pattern of the enemy character in the single battle production (confrontation reach variation production) is decided.
For this, first, an appearance pattern lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, based on the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) designated by the symbol type designation command, it is determined whether or not the specific combination is won.
When it is determined that the specific combination is won, the type of the determined enemy character is confirmed, and a winning appearance pattern lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the type of the appearance pattern is determined based on the acquired appearance pattern lottery random number and the winning appearance pattern lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific combination is not won, the type of the determined enemy character is confirmed, and the appearance pattern lottery table at the time of loss corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the type of the appearance pattern is determined based on the acquired appearance pattern lottery random number and the appearance pattern lottery table at the time of defeat.

In the second single-shot battle effect mode determination process, next, the type of the killing technique of the teammate character in the single-shot battle effect (confrontation reach variation effect) is determined.
For this, first, a special technique lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, based on the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) designated by the symbol type designation command, it is determined whether or not the specific combination is won.
If it is determined that the specific role is won, the friendly character type specified by the friendly character selection information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the determined enemy character type, Is read, and the winning special technique lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the acquired special move lottery random number and the special move lottery table at the time of winning, the type of the special move is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific role is not won, the friendly character type specified by the friendly character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the determined enemy character type Are read, and the deadly killing technique lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the type of the special move is determined based on the acquired special move lottery random number and the special move lottery table at the time of loss.

In the second single battle effect mode determination process, next, the mode of change effect (variation effect number) is determined.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a first confrontation reach variation effect lottery table corresponding to a confrontation reach variation effect (single battle effect) as a variation effect lottery table.
In addition, as the first confrontation reach variation effect lottery table, the type of the second variation pattern (“confrontation reach variation (at the time of winning)” or “confrontation reach variation (at the time of defeat)”), the type of ally character, and the enemy character A first confrontation reach variation effect lottery table corresponding to each combination of type and type of appearance pattern is stored.
In each first confrontation reach variation effect lottery table, a single shot corresponding to a combination of a friendly character type, an enemy character type, and an appearance pattern type corresponding to the first confrontation reach variation effect lottery table. The variable production number related to the battle production (confrontation reach fluctuation production) is registered.
Also, in the first confrontation reach variation effect lottery table corresponding to “confrontation reach variation (during winning)”, “confrontation reach variation variation effect (single battle effect)” is selected as the variation effect mode (variation effect number). Only the corresponding variable production number is registered.
On the other hand, in the first confrontation reach variation production lottery table corresponding to “confrontation reach variation (at the time of defeat)”, as the variation production mode (variation production number), “confrontation reach variation at the time of defeat (single battle production)” Only the corresponding variable production number is registered.

  When determining the mode of variation effect, first, the variation effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the type of the second variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command (“confrontation reach variation (during winning)” or “confrontation reach variation (during defeat)” and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 Check the type of friendly character specified by the selected friendly character selection information, the type of enemy character determined, and the type of appearance pattern determined, and the first confrontation reach variation lottery corresponding to the confirmation result Then, the mode (variation effect number) of the variation effect is determined based on the acquired variation effect lottery random number and the first confrontation reach variation effect lottery table.

Next, the second individual battle effect mode determination process executed in the confrontation reach variation effect determination process will be described.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a second confrontation reach variation effect lottery table corresponding to the confrontation reach variation effect (individual battle effect) as the variation effect lottery table.
In addition, as the second confrontation reach variation effect lottery table, the type of the second variation pattern (“confrontation reach variation (at the time of winning)” or “confrontation reach variation (at the time of defeat)”) and the mode of continuous battle effect (continuous battle effect) Number) and a value of an individual battle number counter described later, a second confrontation reach variation effect lottery table corresponding to each combination is stored.
And in the 2nd confrontation reach variation production lottery table corresponding to each consecutive battle production number, the friend character which relates to the type corresponding to the continuous battle production number, and the opposing character which relates to the type corresponding to the continuous battle production number, The variation production number related to the individual battle production (confrontation reach fluctuation production) in which, is played is registered.
Also, in the second confrontation reach variation production lottery table corresponding to “confrontation reach variation (during winning)”, “confrontation reach variation variation production (individual battle production)” is selected as the variation production mode (variation production number). Only the corresponding variable production number is registered.
On the other hand, in the second confrontation reach variation production lottery table corresponding to “confrontation reach variation (at the time of defeat)”, “confrontation reach variation variation production (individual battle production)” as the variation production mode (variation production number). Only the corresponding variable production number is registered.

  In the second individual battle effect mode determination process, first, a variable effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of the second variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command (“confrontation reach variation (during winning)” or “confrontation reach variation (during defeat)”, and the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in step S36-13. The continuous battle effect number set in the predetermined area and the current individual battle number counter value are confirmed, and the second confrontation reach variation effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the second confrontation reach variation effect lottery table, the mode of variation effect (variation effect number) is determined.

In step S33-3, stop effect determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect mode (stop effect number) is determined.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a stop effect determination table in which correspondence between a change effect mode (variation effect number) and a stop effect mode (stop effect number) is registered.
In the stop effect determination predetermined, the stop effect determination table is read out. Of the stop effect modes (stop effect numbers) registered in the stop effect determination table, the one corresponding to the change effect mode (variable effect number) determined in step S33-2 is used as the stop effect mode. decide.
Then, the determined stop effect mode (stop effect number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not it is in the continuous channel period, and if it is determined that it is in the continuous channel period (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5 and is determined not to be in the continuous channel period. If yes (No), the process proceeds to step S33-9.
Here, when “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period, it is determined that it is during the continuous channel period, and when “0” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period. , It is determined that it is not in consecutive Chang period.
In step S33-5, it is determined whether or not the continuous battle effect is being executed. If it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-6, and the continuous battle effect is determined. When it determines with performing (Yes), it transfers to step S33-9.
Here, when “1” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, and “0” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area. It is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not “V prize winning small hits” has been won. If it is determined that “V prize winning small hits” has been won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7. If it is determined that the “V winning prize non-winning bonus” is not won (No), the process proceeds to step S33-9.
Here, it is determined whether or not “V winning prize small bonus” is won based on the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) designated by the symbol type designation command.

In step S33-7, a lottery effect lottery process at the time of loss is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-8. In the winning lottery process at the time of loss, the type of the small hit effect (small hit effect at the time of loss) related to the single battle effect (confrontation introduction variation effect or confrontation reach variation effect) is determined.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, when a “V prize-winning small hit” is won, a small hit effect at the time of loss is executed as a small hit effect executed during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state.
The loss winning small hit effect is an effect that suggests the result of prior determination (step S9-8) based on the start information stored in the start information storage area.
Specifically, in the special winning effect at the time of loss, whether or not the special figure 2 starting information stored in the special figure 2 starting information storage area includes special figure 2 starting information indicating that the specific role has been won is included. It is a production that suggests.
In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific role is won is included in the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area as the type of the small win effect at the time of the loss. A plurality of winning effect types at the time of loss are set with different expectation values for being present.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a lottery effect lottery table at the time of lost election in which the correspondence between the value of the lottery effect lottery random number and the mode of the bonus hit effect at the time of loss (small hit effect number) is registered. Has been. In each winning game lottery table, the winning effect number related to the winning game bonus effect is registered.
Further, when the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area includes special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific role has been won as the lottery effect lottery table at the time of loss. The corresponding first figure winning start lottery table and the special figure 2 starting information stored in the special figure 2 starting information storage area do not include special figure 2 starting information indicating that the specific role has been won. The second winning lottery effect lottery table corresponding to the case is stored.

In the lottery effect lottery process at the time of a loss, first, a small lottery effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Whether or not the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) includes hold information that specifies that the specific role has been won. Determine whether.
When the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) includes the hold information designating that the specific role is won. If determined, the first winning lottery effect lottery table is read. Then, based on the acquired small hitting effect lottery random number and the first winning lottery effect lottery table, the mode (small hitting effect number) of the lost hitting small hitting effect is determined.
On the other hand, if the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) does not include the hold information designating that the specific role is won If it is determined, the second winning lottery effect lottery table is read. And based on the acquired small hitting effect lottery random number and the second winning lottery effect lottery table, the mode (small hitting effect number) of the lost hitting small hitting effect is determined.

In step S33-8, a small hitting effect setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-9. In the lost winning small hit effect setting process, the mode of the lost winning small hit effect (small winning effect number) determined in step S33-7 is stored (saved) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S33-9, a variation effect start process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variation effect start process, the variation effect is started.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores effect control tables corresponding to various effects. Specifically, as an effect control table, an effect control table corresponding to each variable effect number, an effect control table corresponding to each stop effect number, an effect control table corresponding to each small hit effect number, and each jackpot effect An effect control table corresponding to the number, an effect control table corresponding to the V winning effect, an effect control table corresponding to each ending effect number, an effect control table corresponding to each initial notification effect number, and each additional effect number A corresponding production control table is stored.
Each effect control table includes various effects (display of effect images on the image display device 23, driving of the drums 24a to 24c on the drum display device 24, output of effect sounds by the sound generator 22, and lighting of the lamps 20 and 21. Etc.) is registered.
In the variation effect start process, an effect control table corresponding to the variation effect mode (variation effect number) determined in step S33-2 is read.
Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the fluctuating effect based on the set effect control table is started.

Next, the stop effect management process executed in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing stop effect management processing.
When the stop effect management process is executed in step S32-6, the process first proceeds to step S34-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that a stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2, and the stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is not (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
Here, whether or not the stop designation command is received is determined based on whether or not the stop designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S34-2, a stop effect start process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect start process, the stop effect is started.
Specifically, in the stop effect start process, an effect control table corresponding to the stop symbol mode (stop effect number) set in step S33-3 is read.
Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the stop effect based on the set effect control table is started.

Next, the small hit effect management process executed in step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the small hit effect management process. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a prior determination result pattern.
When the small hit effect management process is executed in step S32-7, the process first proceeds to step S35-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that the opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2 and the opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is not (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
Here, whether or not the opening designation command is received is determined based on whether or not the opening designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S35-2, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command specifies “small hit” (“1 small hit” to “6 small hits”), and the opening designation command specifies “small hit”. If it is determined (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-3, and if it is determined that the opening designation command does not specify “small hit” (No), the series of processing ends and the next The process proceeds to (S32-8).

In step S35-3, it is determined whether or not it is in the continuous channel period, and if it is determined that it is not in the continuous channel period (No), the process proceeds to step S35-4 and is determined to be in the continuous channel period. If yes (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-5.
Here, when “0” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period, it is determined that the flag is not in the continuous channel period, and when “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period, It is determined that it is in the continuous Chang period.
In step S35-4, a normal small hit effect start process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the normal small hit effect start processing, the small hit effect is started.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a normal time small hit effect selection table in which the correspondence between each type of “small hit” and the mode of the small hit effect (small hit effect number) is registered.
In the normal small hit effect start process, first, the type of “small hit” designated by the opening designation command is confirmed. Further, the normal small hit effect selection table is read. Then, based on the confirmed type of “small hit” and the normal time small hit effect selection table, the mode of the small hit effect (small hit effect number) is determined.
Furthermore, the effect control table corresponding to the determined mode of the small hit effect (stop effect number) is read out. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the small hit effect based on the set effect control table is started.
In step S35-5, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command designates “V winning winning small winnings” (“1 small winning” to “3 small winnings”), and the opening specifying command specifies “V winning small possible winning”. If it is determined that “winning” is not designated (No), the process proceeds to step S35-6, and if it is determined that the opening designation command designates “V winning winning bonus” (Yes). Then, the process proceeds to step S35-7.

In step S35-6, the small hitting effect start process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the small hitting effect start processing at the time of a loss, the small hitting effect is started.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a continuous battle effect medium / small hit effect selection table in which the correspondence between the value of the individual battle number counter and the mode of the small hit effect (small hit effect number) is registered.
Moreover, the continuous battle effect medium / small hit effect selection table corresponding to each aspect (each continuous battle effect number) of the continuous battle effect is stored as the continuous battle effect medium / small hit effect selection table.
Then, in the continuous battle effect medium / small hit effect selection table corresponding to each continuous battle effect number, a teammate character related to the type corresponding to the continuous battle effect number, and an opposing character related to the type corresponding to the continuous battle effect number, and The small hit effect number related to the small hit effect in which, appears is registered.
In the process of starting a small hit effect at the time of a loss, it is first determined whether or not a continuous battle effect is being executed. Here, when “1” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, and “0” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area. It is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed.
If it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, the continuous battle effect number set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is confirmed in step S36-13, and the continuous battle effect corresponding to the confirmation result is confirmed. Read the small / medium win production selection table.
In addition, the current value of the individual battle number counter is confirmed. And the aspect corresponding to the value of the confirmed individual battle number counter among the aspects of the small hit effect (small hit effect number) registered in the read continuous battle effect medium / small hit effect selection table is the aspect of the small hit effect It is determined as (small hit production number).
Further, an effect control table corresponding to the determined small hit effect number is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the small hit effect based on the set effect control table is started.
Further, “1” is subtracted from the value of the individual battle number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the individual battle number counter is “0”. Then, when it is determined that the value of the individual battle number counter is “0”, “0” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area. Thus, the continuous battle effect is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the individual battle number counter is not “0” (“1” or more), the state where “1” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area is maintained. Thereby, a continuous battle effect is continued.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed, the effect control table corresponding to the mode of the small hitting effect (small hit effect number) set in step S33-8 is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the small hit effect based on the set effect control table is started.

In step S35-7, a round number suggestion effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-8. In the round number suggestion effect lottery process, the mode of the round number suggestion effect (round number suggestion effect number) is determined.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the number of rounds is determined when “V winning winning small hits” is won during the consecutive Chang period and the passing of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state. The suggestion effect is executed.
The “round number suggestion effect” is the number of round games executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state that occurs in response to the V prize (the prize ball that the player can acquire during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state) It is a production that suggests the number.
In the present embodiment, a mode with no extra and a mode with an extra are set as modes of the round number suggestion effect.

The non-additional aspect is an aspect of the round number suggestion effect composed only of the initial notification effect.
The addition mode is an aspect of a round number suggestion effect composed of an initial notification effect and an additional effect of 1 [times] or more.
In the round number suggestion effect, the acquired round number suggestion icon is displayed on the display screen 23 a of the image display device 23. In the round number suggestion effect, the number of round games executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is suggested by the number of acquired round number suggestion icons displayed on the display screen 23a.

Specifically, in the non-addition mode, in the initial announcement effect, the number of acquired round number suggestion icons finally displayed matches the number of round games corresponding to the selected “small hit” type.
That is, at the start of the initial announcement production, if an acquisition round number suggestion icon of the same number as the number of round games corresponding to the type of “small hit” selected is displayed, then the displayed acquisition round The number of number suggestion icons is never increased.
On the other hand, at the start of the initial notification production, if an acquired round number suggestion icon smaller than the number of round games corresponding to the type of “winning” is displayed, The number of acquired round number suggestion icons displayed is increased to the same number as the number of round games corresponding to the selected “small hit” type.
On the other hand, in the added mode, an obtained round number suggestion icon is displayed in a number smaller than the number of round games corresponding to the selected “small hit” type in the initial notification effect.
Thereafter, in each extra presentation, 1 [number] or more acquired round number suggestion icons are added (increased).
As a result of the last addition, the number of acquired round number suggestion icons is increased to the same number as the number of round games corresponding to the selected “small hit” type.

In the present embodiment, the first round number suggesting effect and the second round number suggesting effect, which are different from each other, are set as the types of round number suggesting effects.
When “the first round number suggestion effect” is selected, an extra mode is always selected as an aspect of the round number suggestion effect. That is, when the first round number suggesting effect is selected, an additional effect of 1 [times] or more is always executed.
When the “second round number suggestion effect” is selected, a mode with no addition or a mode with an addition is selected as the mode of the round number suggestion effect.
In the present embodiment, when “V winning prize winning hit” is won through the continuous battle effect, “the first round number suggesting effect” is selected as the type of the round number suggesting effect. On the other hand, in the case where “V winning prize winning hit” is won through a single battle effect, “second round number suggestion effect” is selected as the type of round number suggestion effect.

The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a round number suggestion effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the round number suggestion effect lottery random number value and the round number suggestion effect mode (round number suggestion effect number) is registered. Yes.
In addition, as a round number suggestion effect lottery table, a first round number suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to the case of passing through a continuous battle effect, a second round number suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to a case of passing through a single battle effect, Is stored.
Then, in the first round number suggestion effect lottery table, only the mode number of the round number suggestion effect (round number suggestion effect number) belonging to (corresponding to) an added mode is registered (belonging to the non-addition mode (corresponding). ) A mode of round number suggestion effect (round number suggestion effect number) is not registered).
On the other hand, in the second round number suggestion effect lottery table, the aspect number of the round number suggestion effect (round number suggestion effect number) belonging to the mode with the addition (corresponding) and the round number suggestion effect belonging to the mode without the addition (corresponding). Are registered (number of rounds suggestion production number).
In addition, as the first round number suggestion effect lottery table, the first round number suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to various types of “small hits” (“small hit 1” to “small hit 3”) is stored.
In addition, as the second round number suggestion effect lottery table, a first round number suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to various types of “small hits” (“small hit 1” to “small hit 3”) is stored.
In each round number suggestion effect lottery table, rounds for which the number of acquired rounds suggestion icons of the same number as the number of rounds corresponding to each “small hit” corresponding to the round number suggestion effect lottery table are finally displayed. The number suggestion effect mode (round number suggestion effect number) is registered.

In the round number suggestion effect lottery process, first, a round number suggestion effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area.
And when it determines with "1" being set to the flag area | region during a continuous battle effect, the 1st round number suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to the type of "small hit" which an opening designation | designated command designates is read. Then, based on the acquired round number suggestion effect lottery random number and the first round number suggestion effect lottery table, a mode of the round number suggestion effect (round number suggestion effect number) is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined that “0” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area, the second round number suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to the “small hit” type designated by the opening designation command is read. And the mode (round number suggestion effect number) of a round number suggestion effect is determined based on the acquired round number suggestion effect lottery random number and the second round number suggestion effect lottery table.

In step S35-8, a battle icon lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-9. In the battle icon lottery process, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous battle effect (whether or not to acquire a battle icon).
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the start information stored in the start information storage area at the start of the small hit gaming state, depending on the type of battle effect (single battle effect or continuous battle effect) executed after the end of the big hit game state The result of the prior determination based on (step S9-8) is suggested.
Specifically, depending on the type of battle effect (single battle effect or continuous battle effect) executed after the end of the jackpot game state, the special figure stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small hit game state It is suggested whether or not the special start 2 information indicating that the specific start is won is included in the start 2 information.
In particular, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of battle effect (single battle effect or continuous battle effect) executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small hit gaming state. It is suggested whether or not the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific role is won is included in the special figure 2 start information in which the start determination is executed first to third among the special figure 2 start information. The
The battle icon is an effect that suggests (informs) that a continuous battle effect is to be executed after the jackpot gaming state ends.
In this embodiment, when a battle icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of a battle type suggestion effect (a jackpot effect), which will be described later, a continuous battle is performed after the jackpot game state ends. Production is performed. That is, each time (maximum 3 times) of the notification effect executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes an individual battle effect (continuous battle effect).
On the other hand, if the battle icon is not displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, the continuous battle effect is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In other words, each time of changing effects executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a single battle effect.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small hit gaming state depending on whether or not the battle icon is displayed during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect. Among them, it is suggested whether or not the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination is won is included in the special figure 2 start information in which the start determination is executed first to third.
When a continuous battle effect is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends (when a battle icon is displayed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state), a one-shot battle effect is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends ( The special figure 2 starting information stored in the special figure 2 starting information storage area at the time of the start of the small hit gaming state is won in comparison with the case where the battle icon is not displayed during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state) The expectation value for the fact that the special figure 2 starting information indicating this is included is high.

In the battle icon lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a continuous battle effect execution condition (battle icon acquisition condition) is satisfied.
In this embodiment, when the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “3” or more, it is determined that the continuous battle effect execution condition is satisfied, and the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is less than “3”. In some cases, it is determined that the continuous battle effect execution condition is not satisfied.
And when it determines with satisfy | filling the continuous battle effect execution conditions, the battle icon lottery which determines whether a continuous battle effect is performed (whether a battle icon is acquired) is performed.
On the other hand, when it determines with not satisfy | filling the continuous battle effect execution conditions, it determines not performing a battle icon lottery and not performing a continuous battle effect (a battle icon is not acquired).

Next, battle icon lottery will be described.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a battle icon lottery table in which the winning value of the battle icon lottery is registered.
Moreover, the battle icon lottery table corresponding to each prior determination result pattern is stored as a battle icon lottery table.
“Prior determination result pattern” refers to a pattern of the result of prior determination. As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, “Pattern A” to “Pattern D” are set as the advance determination result patterns.
“Pattern A” indicates that the hold information for which the notification display is executed first is included among the hold information (the special figure 2 start information storage area) stored in the second hold information storage area (the special figure 2 start information storage area). It is a pre-judgment result pattern that specifies that a specific role has been won. In “Pattern A”, the second and third notification display is executed among the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area). Regardless of the content of the hold information to be made.
“Pattern B” is the hold information for which the notification display is executed first among the hold information (the special figure 2 start information storage area) stored in the second hold information storage area (the special figure 2 start information storage area). It is specified that the specific combination is not won, and the hold information on which the second notification display is executed is a prior determination result pattern that specifies that the specific combination is won. In “Pattern B”, the hold information is displayed thirdly in the hold information (the special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (the special figure 2 start information storage area). Regardless of the content of the information.
“Pattern C” is the hold information for which the notification display is executed first among the hold information (the special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (the special figure 2 start information storage area). It is specified that the specified role is not elected, the hold information on which the second notification display is executed is specified, the specified role is not selected, and the third hold information on which the notification display is executed is the specified role. It is a pre-judgment result pattern that specifies that the player has won.
“Pattern D” is the hold information for which the notification display is executed first among the hold information (the special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (the special figure 2 start information storage area). It is specified that the specified role is not elected, the hold information on which the second notification display is executed is specified, the specified role is not selected, and the third hold information on which the notification display is executed is the specified role. It is a pre-judgment result pattern that specifies that it is not won.
The probability of winning the battle icon lottery includes the battle icon lottery table corresponding to “pattern C”, the battle icon lottery table corresponding to “pattern B”, the battle icon lottery table corresponding to “pattern A”, and “pattern D”. "Is set in order of the battle icon lottery table corresponding to" (high → low).

In the battle icon lottery, first, a battle icon lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the contents of the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) are confirmed. Then, a prior determination result pattern ("pattern A" to "pattern D") is determined. Furthermore, the battle icon lottery table corresponding to the determined prior determination result pattern is read.
Then, based on the acquired battle icon lottery random number and the battle icon lottery table, it is determined whether to execute a continuous battle effect (whether to acquire a battle icon). At this time, if the acquired value of the battle icon lottery random number matches the winning value registered in the read battle icon lottery table, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is executed (the battle icon is acquired). When the acquired battle icon lottery random value does not match the winning value registered in the read battle icon lottery table, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not executed (the battle icon is not acquired). .
Further, the preliminary determination result pattern information indicating the determined preliminary determination result pattern is stored (saved) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S35-9, a congratulations icon lottery process is performed and it transfers to step S35-10. In the celebration icon lottery process, it is determined whether or not to acquire a celebration icon.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, prior determination based on the start information stored in the start information storage area at the start of the small hit gaming state depending on whether or not a congratulation icon is displayed during execution of the battle type suggestion effect. The result of (Step S9-8) is suggested.
Specifically, during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, depending on whether or not a congratulation icon is displayed, the special figure 2 start information ( It is suggested whether or not all the special figure 2 start information) includes special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won.
In the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small hit gaming state does not include special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific role is won During the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, the celebration icon is not displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23.
That is, when a congratulation icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of the battle type suggestion effect, it is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small hit gaming state. It is determined that the special figure 2 start information includes special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination is won.
When a battle icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of the battle type suggestion effect, a celebration icon is not displayed during execution of the battle type suggestion effect. .

In the celebration icon lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a celebration icon acquisition condition is satisfied.
In this embodiment, (1) it is determined not to acquire a battle icon in step S35-8, (2) the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “1” or more, and (3) On hold information (Special Figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (Special Figure 2 start information storage area) holds information (Special Figure 2 start information) designating that the specific role has been won. It is determined that the congratulation icon acquisition condition is satisfied when all of the above are included.
If it is determined that the celebration icon acquisition condition is satisfied, a celebration icon lottery for determining whether or not to acquire a celebration icon is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the celebration icon acquisition condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the celebration icon lottery is not executed and the celebration icon is not acquired.

Next, the celebration icon lottery will be described.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a celebration icon lottery table in which the winning value of the celebration icon lottery is registered.
In the celebration icon lottery, first, a celebration icon lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the acquired celebration icon lottery random number and the celebration icon lottery table, it is determined whether or not to acquire the celebration icon. At this time, when the value of the acquired celebration icon lottery random number matches the winning value registered in the celebration icon lottery table, it is determined that the celebration icon is acquired, and the acquired value of the celebration icon lottery random number is If it does not coincide with the winning value registered in the read congratulation icon lottery table, it is determined that the congratulation icon is not acquired.

In step S35-10, the opposing character lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-11. In the opposing character lottery process, the type of the opposing character that appears (displayed) in the battle type suggestion effect is determined.
In the pachinko machine 1, the jackpot effect is executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. And, as the type of jackpot effect, “battle type suggesting effect” and “judge effect” described later are set.
And in the pachinko machine 1, when the “small hit” is won by the special symbol lottery executed during the continuous period, and the passing of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state. In addition, a battle type suggesting effect is executed as a jackpot effect.
The “battle type suggestion effect” is an effect that suggests a type of battle effect (single battle effect or continuous battle effect) that is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.
In particular, in the battle type suggestion effect, whether or not to acquire a battle icon during execution of the battle type suggestion effect is suggested depending on the type of the opposing character that appears.
Specifically, in the battle type suggestion effect, on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23, an effect image in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other is displayed, and depending on whether or not the opposing characters start a battle, The type of battle effect to be executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is suggested (notified).
At this time, if both characters that face each other start a battle, a battle icon is displayed during execution of the battle type suggestion effect, and it is suggested that a continuous battle effect is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends ( Notification).
On the other hand, if the opposing characters do not start the battle, the battle icon is not displayed during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, and it is suggested that the one-off battle effect is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends ( Notification).

And in the battle type suggestion effect, the execution of the battle type suggestion effect is performed by a combination of a preselected friend character type and an opposing character type as an enemy character (hereinafter referred to as “competition combination”). The expected value for acquiring the battle icon (the continuous battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state) is suggested.
Here, the “expected value” means that when the battle combination is determined (displayed), a battle icon is acquired during the execution of the battle type suggesting effect (a continuous battle effect is executed after the jackpot game state is ended) The degree of possibility.
In the present embodiment, one type of enemy character is determined from six types of enemy characters (“enemy character A” to “enemy character F”) as opposing characters appearing in the battle type suggestion effect.
Then, when a continuous battle effect is executed after the jackpot gaming state is finished, a continuous battle effect (individual battle effect for each time) is executed with the opposing character appearing in the battle type suggestion effect as an opponent.

The ROM of the production control circuit 300 stores an opposing character lottery table in which the correspondence between the opposing character lottery random number value and the type of the opposing character (“enemy character A” to “enemy character F”) is registered. Yes.
In addition, as a confrontation character lottery table, a confrontation character corresponding to each combination of battle icon acquisition status, congratulation icon acquisition status, and ally character type ("friend character A" to "ally character C"). A lottery table is stored.
In the opposing character lottery process, first, the opposing character lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the type of the friendly character specified by the friendly character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the acquisition status of the battle icon determined in step S35-8 (acquisition of the battle icon is determined). And the acquisition status of the celebration icon determined in step S35-9 (whether or not the acquisition of the celebration icon has been determined) is confirmed, and the opposing character lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. And the kind of opposing character is determined based on the acquired opposing character lottery random number and the opposing character lottery table.

In step S35-11, a battle type suggestion effect setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-12. In the battle type suggestion effect setting process, the mode (big hit effect number) of the battle type suggestion effect is determined.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a battle type suggestion effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the battle type suggestion effect lottery random number and the mode of the battle type suggestion effect (big hit effect number) is registered. In each battle type suggestion effect lottery table, the jackpot effect number related to the battle type suggestion effect is registered.
In addition, the battle type suggestion effect lottery table includes battle icon acquisition status, celebration icon acquisition status, ally character type ("friend character A" to "ally character C"), and opposing character type ("enemy" A battle type suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to each of the combinations of “Character A” to “Enemy character F”) is stored.
Each battle type suggestion effect lottery table includes a combination of a battle icon acquisition status, a celebration icon acquisition status, a friend character type, and an opposing character type corresponding to the battle type suggestion effect lottery table. The jackpot production number related to the battle type suggestion production corresponding to is registered.

In the battle type suggestion effect setting process, first, a battle type suggestion effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the type of the friendly character specified by the friendly character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the acquisition status of the battle icon determined in step S35-8 (acquisition of the battle icon is determined). ), The acquisition status of the celebration icon determined in step S35-9 (whether acquisition of the celebration icon has been determined), and the type of the opposing character determined in step S35-10 Then, the battle type suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the acquired battle type suggestion effect lottery random number and the battle type suggestion effect lottery table, the mode of the battle type suggestion effect (big hit effect number) is determined.
Further, the determined battle type suggesting effect mode (big hit effect number) is stored (saved) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S35-12, the winning small hit effect start process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the small hit effect start process at the time of winning, the small hit effect is started.
In the win-winning effect start process, it is first determined whether or not a continuous battle effect is being executed. Here, when “1” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, and “0” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area. It is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed.
If it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, the continuous battle effect number set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is confirmed in step S36-13, and the continuous battle effect corresponding to the confirmation result is confirmed. Read the small / medium win production selection table.
In addition, the current value of the individual battle number counter is confirmed. And the aspect corresponding to the value of the confirmed individual battle number counter among the aspects of the small hit effect (small hit effect number) registered in the read continuous battle effect medium / small hit effect selection table is the aspect of the small hit effect It is determined as (small hit production number).
Further, an effect control table corresponding to the determined small hit effect number is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the small hit effect based on the set effect control table is started.
Further, the value of the individual battle number counter is reset, and “0” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area. Thus, the continuous battle effect is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed, the mode of the winning small hit effect corresponding to the single battle effect (small hit effect number) as the mode of the small hit effect at the time of winning (small hit effect number) To decide.
In addition, an effect control table corresponding to the determined winning effect small hit effect mode (small hit effect number) is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the small hit effect based on the set effect control table is started.

Next, the jackpot presentation management process executed in step S32-8 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the jackpot presentation management process.
When the jackpot presentation management process is executed in step S32-8, as shown in FIG. 42, the process first proceeds to step S36-1.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that the opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2 and the opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is not (No), the process proceeds to step S36-8.
Here, whether or not the opening designation command is received is determined based on whether or not the opening designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command designates "big hit"("small hit continuation 1 big hit" to "6 small hits big hit,""big hit 1" or "small hit 2"). If it is determined that the opening designation command designates “big jackpot” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and if the opening designation command determines that “big jackpot” is not designated (No) ) Goes to Step S36-8.
In step S36-3, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command designates “small hit continuation big hit” (“small continuation big hit” to “6 small hit continuation big hit”). If it is determined that “Continuous jackpot” is not specified (“Big jackpot 1” or “Big jackpot 2” is specified) (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4, and the opening designation command is “ If it is determined that “continuation jackpot” is designated (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-6.

In step 36-4, a judgment effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-5. In the judge effect lottery process, a mode (a jackpot effect number) of a judge effect (a jackpot effect) is determined.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, when the “big hit 1” or “big hit 2” is won, a judgment effect is executed as a big hit effect.
The “judgment effect” is an effect that suggests whether or not the short-time control is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the continuous time period is started).
In the present embodiment, the judge effect includes an ally character selection effect and a judge result effect.
The “friend character selection effect” is an effect of selecting the type of the friend character (“friend character A” to “ally character C”) in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 5b by the player.
Specifically, during execution of the teammate character selection effect, the teammate character selection image is displayed on the display screen 23 a of the image display device 23. In addition, during the execution of the teammate character selection effect, an operation valid period during which the depressing operation of the effect button 5b is valid is set.
The display of the teammate character selection image is started in response to the start of the teammate character selection effect. Then, in the teammate character selection image, one type of teammate character among “teammate character A” to “teammate character C” is selected.
The operation valid period starts as a predetermined time elapses from the start of the teammate character effect. During the operation valid period, every time the effect button 5b is pressed (each time the first operation signal is input from the first operation detection switch 24), the ally selected as the selection target in the ally character selection image. The character type is changed.
The operation valid period ends when a predetermined time elapses from the start. Then, in the teammate character selection effect, at the end of the operation valid period, the type of the teammate character selected in the teammate character selection image is determined (confirmed) as the type of the teammate character selected by the teammate character selection effect. Is done.
Then, at the end of the teammate character selection effect, teammate character selection information that specifies the type of the teammate character selected by the teammate character selection effect is stored (saved) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the performance control circuit 300.
As a result, when the continuous game period starts after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the ally character that appears in the battle performance (single battle production or continuous battle production) executed during the continuous game period A teammate character related to the type selected by the character selection effect is set.

The “judgment result effect” is an effect that suggests whether or not the short-time control is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the continuous time period is started). At this time, in the judgment result effect, whether or not the short-time control is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state according to the effect content corresponding to the type of the friendly character selected by the friendly character selection effect (the continuous period is started). Whether or not) is suggested.
In this embodiment, as the types of judge effects, “judge effect A” corresponding to “friend character A”, “judge effect B” corresponding to “friend character B”, and “friend character C” corresponding to “friend character C”. “Judge effect C” is set.
In “Judge effect A”, an effect image by “friend character A” is displayed on the display screen 23 a of the image display device 23.
In “Judge effect B”, an effect image by “friend character B” is displayed on the display screen 23 a of the image display device 23.
In the “judge effect C”, the effect image by the “friend character C” is displayed on the display screen 23 a of the image display device 23.
In “Judge effect A” to “Judge effect C”, whether or not the time-shortening control is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the continuous channel period is started) is determined depending on different contents of the effect. It is suggested.
In the “judge effect A”, based on whether or not the same type of identification information is displayed (stopped) at a predetermined stop position of the three drums 24a to 24c of the drum type display device 24 at a predetermined timing. It is suggested whether or not the short-time control is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the continuous time period is started).
In the “judge effect B”, the operation of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period set during the execution of the judge effect, or an effect displayed according to the progress of the operation effective period, It is suggested whether or not the short-time control is started after the end (whether or not the continuous time period is started).
In “Judge effect C”, based on the number of judge icons displayed during the execution of the judge effect (the number of acquired judge icons), whether or not the time reduction control is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state (continuous) Whether or not the Chang period starts).

The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a judge effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the judge effect lottery random number and the mode of the judge effect (big hit effect number) is registered.
In addition, as a judge production lottery table, judges corresponding to various types of jackpot gaming states to be started (each of “one bonus per jackpot” to “6 bonus jackpots per jackpot”, “one jackpot one” and “two jackpots”), respectively. An effect lottery table is stored.
In addition, as a judgment effect lottery table corresponding to “Big jackpot 2”, when “Big jackpot 2” is won by special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) executed during execution of the time reduction control A corresponding judge effect lottery table, and a judge effect lottery table corresponding to a case where “big hit 2” is won by a special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) executed while the time-control is stopped. , Is stored.
Then, in the judgment effect lottery table corresponding to “one consecutive jackpot per jackpot” to “6 consecutive jackpots per jackpot” or “one jackpot one jackpot”, the time reduction control is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state (the continuous Chang period is A judgment effect mode (a jackpot effect number) related to the effect content suggesting that it is started) is registered.
On the other hand, the jackpot effect lottery table corresponding to the case where “big hit 2” is won by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) executed during the execution of the short-time control is displayed in the jackpot game state A mode of a judge effect (a jackpot effect number) related to the effect content suggesting that the time-shortening control is started after the end of the time (the continuous channel period is started) is registered.
On the other hand, the jackpot effect lottery table corresponding to the case where “big hit 2” is won by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) executed during the stoppage of the short-time control is displayed in the jackpot game state A mode of a judge effect (a jackpot effect number) related to the effect content suggesting that the time-shortening control is not started after the end of (the continuous channel period is not started) is registered.

  In the judge effect lottery process, first, a judge effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the judgment effect lottery table corresponding to the winning type designated by the opening designation command is read. At this time, if the winning type designated by the opening designation command is “big hit 2”, it is determined whether or not “big hit 2” has been won based on a special symbol lottery executed during the execution of the time reduction control. The judgment effect lottery table corresponding to this determination result is read out. Then, based on the acquired judge effect lottery random number and the judge effect lottery table, the mode of the judge effect (big hit effect number) is determined.

In step S36-5, a judgment effect start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-8. In the judge effect start process, the jackpot effect is started.
In the judge effect start process, an effect control table corresponding to the judge effect mode (big hit effect number) determined in step S36-4 is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, a judgment effect (a jackpot effect) based on the set effect control table is started.
In the judgment effect start processing, next, “1” is set in the big hit gaming state flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S36-6, it is determined whether or not it is in the continuous channel period, and if it is determined that it is not in the continuous channel period (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4 and is determined to be in the continuous channel period. If yes (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-7.
Here, when “0” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period, it is determined that the flag is not in the continuous channel period, and when “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period, It is determined that it is in the continuous Chang period.
In step S36-7, a battle type suggestion effect start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-8. In the battle type suggestion effect start processing, the jackpot effect is started.
In the battle type suggestion effect start process, an effect control table corresponding to the battle type suggestion effect mode (big hit effect number) stored (saved) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in step S35-11 is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, a battle type suggesting effect (a jackpot effect) based on the set effect control table is started.
Further, in the battle type suggestion effect start process, “1” is set in the big hit gaming state flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Also, “1” is set in the battle type suggesting effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S36-8, it is determined whether or not an ending designation command has been received. If it is determined that an ending designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-9, where the ending designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is not (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-9).
Here, whether or not the ending designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the ending designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S36-9, it is determined whether or not the end of the jackpot gaming state is specified. If it is determined that the end of the jackpot gaming state is specified (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-10. If it is determined that the end of the jackpot gaming state is not designated (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-9).
If “1” is set in the jackpot gaming state flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, it is determined that the end of the jackpot gaming state is designated, and the jackpot gaming state flag area is set. When “0” is set, it is determined that the end of the jackpot gaming state is not designated.

In step S36-10, it is determined whether or not the battle type suggesting effect is being executed. If it is determined that the battle type indicating effect is not being executed (the judge effect is being executed) (No), If the process proceeds to S36-11 and it is determined that the battle type suggesting effect is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to Step S36-12.
Here, when “1” is set in the battle type suggestion effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, it is determined that the battle type suggestion effect is being executed, and the battle type suggestion effect flag area If “0” is set in the field, it is determined that the battle type suggestion effect is not being executed.
In step S36-11, a rush state suggestion effect start process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-9). In the rush state suggestion effect start processing, the ending effect is started.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the ending effect is executed during the ending period during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. Then, as the type of ending effect, “rush state suggestion effect” and “rush battle type suggestion effect” to be described later are set.
And in the pachinko machine 1, when winning "big hit 1" or "big hit 2", the rush state suggesting effect is executed as the ending effect.
The “rush state suggestion effect” is an effect that suggests (notifies) whether or not to enter the “continuous chain period” after the jackpot game state ends.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores an entry state suggestion effect selection table in which correspondence between each aspect of the judge effect (big hit effect number) and an entry state suggestion effect aspect (ending effect number) is stored. Yes.
In the rush state suggestion effect start process, first, the type of judgment effect (big hit effect number) determined in step S36-4 is confirmed. Also, the entry state suggestion effect selection table is read out. Then, based on the determined type of the judge effect (big hit effect number) and the entry state suggestion effect selection table, the mode of the entry state suggestion effect (ending effect number) is determined.
And the effect control table corresponding to the aspect (ending effect number) of the determined rush state suggestion effect is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the rush state suggestion effect (ending effect) based on the set effect control table is started.
Also, in the rush state suggestion effect start process, “0” is set in the big hit gaming state flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

  In step S36-12, it is determined whether or not a battle icon is acquired during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the battle icon is determined to be acquired in step S35-8), and it is determined that the battle icon is acquired. If yes (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-13. If it is determined that a battle icon has not been acquired (No), the process proceeds to step S36-14.

In step 36-13, a continuous battle effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-14. In the continuous battle effect lottery process, the mode (continuous battle effect number) of the continuous battle effect is determined.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a continuous battle effect lottery table in which correspondence between the value of the continuous battle effect lottery random number and the mode of the continuous battle effect (continuous battle effect number) is registered.
In addition, as the consecutive battle production lottery table, the types of teammate characters ("Friendly Character A" to "Friendship Character C"), the types of opposing characters ("Enemy Character A" to "Enemy Character F"), and pre-determination results A continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to each of combinations of patterns ("pattern A" to "pattern D") is stored.
Each continuous battle production lottery table includes a series of continuous battle productions in which a teammate character related to the type corresponding to the continuous battle production lottery table and an opposing character related to the type corresponding to the continuous battle production lottery table compete. The battle production number is registered.

The continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to “Pattern A” includes 1 [times] individual battle effects (1 [times] confrontation introduction variation effect), 1 [times] stop effect, and 1 [times]. A continuous battle effect number related to the continuous battle effect composed of the small hit effect is registered.
And in the continuous battle production corresponding to each continuous battle production number registered in the continuous battle production lottery table corresponding to “pattern A”, the ally character is advantageous in the first individual battle production (confrontation introduction variation production). The effect image of the content (in this embodiment, the content that the attack on the enemy character by the teammate character succeeds) is displayed. Also, in the first stop effect, an effect image with content indicating the victory of the teammate character is displayed. In addition, in the first small hit effect, an effect image having contents indicating that the specific combination is won is displayed.

The continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to “pattern B” includes 2 [times] individual battle effects (1 [times] confrontation introduction variation effect and 1 [times] confrontation reach variation effect) and 2 [times]. [Times] stop effect and 2 [times] small hit effect are registered.
And in the continuous battle production corresponding to each continuous battle production number registered in the continuous battle production lottery table corresponding to “pattern B”, the ally character is disadvantageous in the first individual battle production (confrontation introduction variation production). The effect image of the content (in this embodiment, content in which the attack on the enemy character by the teammate character fails) is displayed. Also, in the first stop effect, an effect image with content indicating a failure of the attack by the teammate character is displayed. In addition, in the first small hit effect, an effect image having content indicating that the continuous battle effect continues is displayed.
In addition, in the second individual battle production (confrontation reach variation production), the content that the ally character is advantageous (in this embodiment, after the ally character avoids the attack on the ally character by the enemy character, the ally character against the enemy character by the ally character The effect image of the content of successful counterattack) is displayed. Also, in the second stop effect, an effect image with content indicating the victory of the teammate character is displayed. In addition, in the second small hit effect, an effect image having contents indicating that the specific combination is won is displayed.

The continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to “pattern C” includes 3 [times] individual battle effects (1 [times] confrontation introduction variation effect and 2 [times] confrontation reach variation effects) and 3 [times]. [Times] stop effect and 3 [times] small hit effect are registered.
And in the continuous battle production corresponding to each continuous battle production number registered in the continuous battle production lottery table corresponding to “pattern C”, the ally character is disadvantageous in the first individual battle production (confrontation introduction variation production). The effect image of the content (in this embodiment, content in which the attack on the enemy character by the teammate character fails) is displayed. Also, in the first stop effect, an effect image with content indicating a failure of the attack by the teammate character is displayed. In addition, in the first small hit effect, an effect image having content indicating that the continuous battle effect continues is displayed.
In addition, in the second individual battle effect (confrontation reach variation effect), an effect image of content that is disadvantageous for the friendly character (content that succeeds in attacking the friendly character by the enemy character in this embodiment) is displayed. In addition, in the second stop effect, an effect image having content indicating that the teammate character has fallen is displayed. In the second small hit effect, an effect image having a content indicating that the continuous battle effect is continued is displayed.
In addition, in the third individual battle effect (confrontation reach variation effect), an effect image of content that is advantageous to the ally character (content in which the ally character revives (rises) in the present embodiment) is displayed. Also, in the third stop effect, an effect image with content indicating the victory of the teammate character is displayed. In addition, in the third small hit effect, an effect image having contents indicating that the specific combination is won is displayed.

The continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to “pattern D” includes 3 [times] individual battle effects (1 [times] confrontation introduction variation effects and 2 [times] confrontation reach variation effects) and 3 [times]. [Times] stop effect and 3 [times] small hit effect are registered.
And in the continuous battle production corresponding to each continuous battle production number registered in the continuous battle production lottery table corresponding to “pattern D”, the ally character is disadvantageous in the first individual battle production (confrontation introduction variation production). The effect image of the content (in this embodiment, content in which the attack on the enemy character by the teammate character fails) is displayed. Also, in the first stop effect, an effect image with content indicating a failure of the attack by the teammate character is displayed. In addition, in the first small hit effect, an effect image having content indicating that the continuous battle effect continues is displayed.
In addition, in the second individual battle effect (confrontation reach variation effect), an effect image of content that is disadvantageous for the friendly character (content that succeeds in attacking the friendly character by the enemy character in this embodiment) is displayed. In addition, in the second stop effect, an effect image having content indicating that the teammate character has fallen is displayed. In the second small hit effect, an effect image having a content indicating that the continuous battle effect is continued is displayed.
In addition, in the third individual battle effect (confrontation reach variation effect), an effect image is displayed in which the ally character is disadvantageous (in this embodiment, the ally character is not revived (cannot stand up)). Also, in the third stop effect, an effect image with content indicating the defeat of the teammate character is displayed. In addition, in the third small hit effect, an effect image having contents indicating the end of the continuous battle effect (transition to the single battle effect) is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the continuous battle effect includes a maximum of 3 [times] individual battle effects.
Then, among the individual battle effects included in the continuous battle effect, a confrontation introduction effect is executed as the first individual battle effect, and a confrontation reach effect is executed as the individual battle effect for each of the second and subsequent times.

The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores continuous battle effect control data corresponding to each aspect of the continuous battle effect (each continuous battle effect number).
The “continuous battle effect control data” is information for executing (controlling) the continuous battle effect. The continuous battle effect control data includes the number of individual battle effects included in the continuous battle effect (hereinafter referred to as “individual battle frequency”) and the like.
In the continuous battle effect lottery process, first, a continuous battle effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter.
Further, the type of the friendly character specified by the friendly character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the type of the opposing character determined in step S35-10, and the type determined in step S35-8. The prior determination result pattern is confirmed, and a continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
And the mode (continuous battle production number) of a continuous battle production is determined based on the acquired continuous battle production lottery random number and a continuous battle production lottery table.
Further, the determined continuous battle effect mode (continuous battle effect number) is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
Furthermore, the continuous battle effect control data corresponding to the determined continuous battle effect number is read, and the individual battle number registered in the read continuous battle effect control data is set in the individual battle number counter.
Further, “1” is set in the continuous battle effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S36-14, a rush battle type suggestion effect start process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-9). In the rush battle type suggestion effect start process, an ending effect is started.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the “small hit” is won by the special symbol lottery executed during the continuous Chang period, and the passing of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, As an ending effect, a rush battle type suggestion effect is executed.
The “rush battle type suggestion effect” is an effect that suggests (notifies) the type of battle effect (“single battle effect” or “continuous battle effect”) executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, there are an aspect corresponding to a case where a single battle effect is entered and an aspect corresponding to a case where a continuous battle effect is entered as an aspect (ending effect number) of a rush battle type suggesting effect. Is set.
In the rush battle type suggestion effect according to the mode corresponding to the case of entering the single battle effect, the rush to the single battle effect is suggested (notified).
In the rush battle type suggestion effect according to the mode corresponding to the case of rushing into the continuous battle effect, the rush to the continuous battle effect is suggested (notified).
In the rush battle type suggestion effect start process, first, it is determined whether or not a battle icon has been acquired during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not acquisition of a battle icon has been determined in step S35-8).
And when it determines with having acquired the battle icon during the occurrence of the jackpot game state (the acquisition of the battle icon has been determined in step S35-8), as the mode of rush battle type suggestion effect (ending effect number) The mode corresponding to the case of entering into the continuous battle effect is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the battle icon has not been acquired during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state (the acquisition of the battle icon has not been determined in step S35-8), the mode of the entry battle type suggestion effect (ending effect) As the number, the mode corresponding to the case of entering the single battle effect is determined.
Further, the effect control table corresponding to the determined rush battle effect suggesting effect mode (ending effect number) is read out. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the rush battle type suggestion effect (ending effect) based on the set effect control table is started.
Further, in the rush battle type suggestion effect start process, “0” is set in the flag area in the jackpot gaming state of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Further, “0” is set in the battle type suggesting effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

Next, the V winning effect management process executed in step S32-9 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the V winning effect management process.
When the V winning effect management process is executed in step S32-9, as shown in FIG. 43, the process first proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not a V winning designation command has been received. If it is determined that a V winning designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2 and the V winning designation command is changed. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-10).
Here, whether or not the V winning designation command is received is determined based on whether or not the V winning designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S37-2, a V winning notification effect start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-3. In the V winning notification effect starting process, the V winning notification effect is started.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, when the passing of the specific area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the V winning notification effect that suggests (notifies) the passing of the V area by the game ball is executed. Is done.
In the V winning notification effect starting process, an effect control table corresponding to the V winning notification effect is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the V winning notification effect based on the set effect control table is started.

In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not it is in the continuous channel period, and if it is determined that it is in the continuous channel period (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4 and is determined not to be in the continuous channel period. If it is (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-10).
Here, when “0” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period, it is determined that the flag is not in the continuous channel period, and when “1” is set in the flag area during the continuous channel period, It is determined that it is in the continuous Chang period.
In step S37-4, a round number suggestion effect start process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-10). In the round number suggestion effect start processing, the round number suggestion effect is started.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores round number suggestion effect control data corresponding to each aspect of the round number suggestion effect (each round number suggestion effect number).
The “round number suggestion effect control data” is information for executing (controlling) the round number suggestion effect. The round number suggestion effect control data includes information for specifying the initial notification effect mode (initial notification effect) included in the round number suggestion effect, information for specifying the number of extra effects included in the round number suggestion effect, It includes information that specifies the mode of the additional effect (addition effect number), information that specifies the execution trigger of each additional effect, and the like. In the present embodiment, the execution trigger for each extra stage effect is set during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state or during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state.
In the round number suggestion effect start process, the round number suggestion effect control data corresponding to the round number suggestion effect mode (round number suggestion effect number) determined in step S35-7 is read. Then, the read round number suggestion effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
Also, referring to the round number suggestion effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the mode of the initial notification effect (initial notification effect number) is confirmed. Further, the effect control table corresponding to the confirmed initial notification effect mode (initial notification effect number) is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the initial notification effect based on the set effect control table is started.
Furthermore, with reference to the round number suggestion effect control data set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the number of extra effects is confirmed. If the number of extra effects is “1” or more, the number of extra effects is set in the extra effect counter, and “1” is set in the extra effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. .

Next, the extra effect management process executed in step S32-10 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the extra effect management process.
When the added effect management process is executed in step S32-10, as shown in FIG. 44, first, the process proceeds to step S38-1.
In step S38-1, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the additional effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, and it is determined that “1” is set in the additional effect flag area ( If Yes, the process proceeds to step S38-2, and if it is determined that “1” is not set in the additional effect flag area (“0” is set) (No), a series of processing is performed. When the process ends, the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-11).
In step S38-2, referring to the round number suggestion effect control data set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the execution timing of the add-on effect corresponding to the value of the current add-on effect number counter has arrived. If it is determined whether or not it is determined that the execution opportunity for the additional effect has arrived (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and it is determined that the execution opportunity for the additional effect has not arrived (No). In this case, the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-11).
In step S38-3, an extra effect start process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-11). In the extra effect start process, the extra effect is started.
In the extra effect start process, first, the value of the extra effect number counter is confirmed. Further, referring to the round number suggestion effect control data set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the added effect number corresponding to the confirmed value of the added effect number counter is read. Further, an effect control table corresponding to the read additional effect number is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the extra effect based on the set effect control table is started.
Further, “1” is subtracted from the value of the number of additional effects. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the additional effect number counter is “0”. Then, when it is determined that the value of the extra effect number counter is “0”, “0” is set in the extra effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the extra effect number counter is not “0” (“1” or more), the state where “1” is set in the extra effect flag area is maintained.

Next, the firing position display management process executed in step S32-11 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the launch position display management process.
When the launch position display management process is executed in step S32-11, as shown in FIG. 45, the process first proceeds to step S39-1.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether a right-handed notification start designation command has been received. If it is determined that a right-handed notification start designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2. If it is determined that the strike notification start designation command has not been received (No), the process proceeds to step S39-3.
Here, whether or not the right-handed notification start designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the right-handed notification start designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S39-2, right-handed notification start processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S39-3. In the right-handed notification start process, a right-handed notification effect is started.
In the pachinko machine 1, during the period that satisfies at least one of the conditions that the jackpot gaming state is occurring, that the jackpot gaming state is occurring, and that it is during the continuous Chang period, A right-handed notification effect for designating (notifying) the launch of a game ball on the right path 30b is executed.
In the right-handed notification effect, information for designating the game ball to be launched into the right path 30b on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 (in this embodiment, a character "right-handed" and an arrow shape pointing to the right side) ) Is displayed.
In the right-handed notification start process, “1” is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
Further, the effect control table corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is read out. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the right-handed notification effect based on the set effect control table is started.

In step S39-3, it is determined whether or not a right-handed notification end designation command has been received. If it is determined that a right-handed notification end designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-4. If it is determined that the strike notification end designation command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-12).
Here, whether or not a right-handed notification end designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the right-handed notification end designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S39-4, right-handed notification end processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S32-12). In the right-handed notification end process, the right-handed notification effect is ended.
In the right-handed notification start process, the right-handed notification effect is ended and “0” is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
At this time, the left-handed notification effect may be started.
In the left-handed notification effect, on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23, information specifying the launch of the game ball to the left path 30a (in this embodiment, the characters “Return to left-handed” and the left side are displayed. A pointing arrow) is displayed.
In such a configuration, an effect control table corresponding to the left-handed notification effect is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the left-handed notification effect based on the set effect control table is started.

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the start gate 41 is passed by a game ball, various random numbers such as a hit random number are acquired, and the acquired various random numbers are stored in the general diagram start information storage area of the RAM 230 as general diagram start information. Is done.
Then, for the general map start information stored in the general map start information storage area, a general map start determination including a normal map winning determination for determining a lottery result ("per normal map" or "off") in a predetermined order. Is executed.
When the normal figure start determination is executed, the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display device 60, and then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the normal symbol winning determination.
When it is determined that the result of the normal symbol lottery is “per normal symbol” by the normal symbol winning determination, the normal symbol stop display is executed, and then the gaming state per normal symbol is generated.
In the normal gaming state, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced from the closed state to the opened state, so that the game ball can enter the second starting port 52.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when a game ball enters the start openings 51 and 52, various random numbers such as a hit random number, a design random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired. Information (special drawing 1 starting information or special figure 2 starting information) is stored in the special drawing starting information storage area (special figure 1 starting information storage area or special figure 2 starting information storage area) of the RAM 230.
Then, with regard to the special figure starting information stored in the special figure starting information storage area, the special figure winning determination for determining the lottery result (“big hit”, “small hit” or “out of”) in a predetermined order, and the stop A start determination including special symbol stop symbol determination for determining a symbol and special symbol variation pattern determination for determining the type of variation pattern related to the variation display for notifying the result of the special symbol failure determination is executed.
In addition, when it is determined that the “big hit” or “small win” is won by the special figure winning determination, the winning type (the type of the big winning gaming state or the type of the small winning gaming state) is determined by the special figure stop symbol determination. Determined.
Here, in the first special symbol lottery (the special symbol winning determination based on the special figure 1 start information), the “small hit” is not won (the lottery result is “big hit” or “out of win”).
On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol winning determination based on the special figure 2 starting information), the “losing” is not won (the lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”).
In addition, as a type of the small hit gaming state that occurs when “small hit” is won, it is possible to pass the V region by a game ball during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state (easy) “V winning winning bonus hit ”(“ 1 small hit ”to“ 3 small hits ”) and“ V winning impossible small hits ”(“ small wins ”) that makes it impossible (difficult) to pass through the V area by the game ball during the small hit gaming state. 4 ”to“ 6 per small hit ”) are set.

When the start determination is executed, the special symbol display devices 61 and 62 display the special symbol variation display based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation pattern determination, and then the result of the stop symbol determination. The special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the above.
Then, if it is determined by the special symbol winning determination that the result of the special symbol lottery is “hit”, the special symbol stop display is executed, and then the jackpot related to the type determined by the special symbol stop symbol determination A gaming state is created.
In the big hit game state, a round game in which the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state is executed. Then, during each round game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the big prize device 53.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is “small hit” by the special symbol winning determination, after the special symbol stop display is executed, the special symbol stop symbol determination relates to the type determined by the special symbol stop symbol determination. A small hit gaming state is created.
In the small hit game state, a small hit game is executed in which the special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Then, during the small hit game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the accessory winning device 54.
When the passing of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state is started in response to the end of the small hit gaming state.
At this time, if “1 small hit” is won, “1 consecutive big hit” will be started, and if “2 small wins” is won, “2 continuous big win” will be started. If “3 small hits” is won, “3 consecutive big hits” will be started, and if “4 small wins” is won, “4 consecutive big hits” will be started and “5 small wins” will be started. In the case of winning, “5 consecutive jackpots per small” is started, and in the case of winning “6 small jackpots”, “6 consecutive big jackpots” is started.
On the other hand, when the passing of the V area by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the state shifts to the “special figure variation waiting state”.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when a predetermined condition including the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied, the time reduction control is started according to the end of the jackpot gaming state.
During execution of the time reduction control, it is easier to establish a condition for acquiring the special figure 2 start information (a game ball enters the second start opening 52) than when the time reduction control is stopped. Specifically, during execution of the time reduction control, the time for displaying the variation of the normal symbol is shortened as compared to when the time reduction control is stopped. Opening time is extended (opening frequency is increased). As a result, during execution of the time reduction control, the possibility that the second special symbol lottery is executed is higher than when the time reduction control is stopped.
In the present embodiment, when a jackpot gaming state related to “one jackpot one” or “one jackpot one consecutive jackpot” to “six jackpot big jackpots” is generated, the time reduction control is performed according to the end of the jackpot gaming state. Is started.
In addition, when “Big jackpot 2” is won by the special symbol lottery executed during the execution of the time reduction control, the time reduction control is started in accordance with the end of the jackpot gaming state.
On the other hand, in the case where “big hit 2” is won by the special symbol lottery executed during stoppage of the time reduction control, the time reduction control is not started in response to the end of the big hit gaming state.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the player can obtain a large number of winning balls by causing the winning ball 53 to enter the winning ball 53 during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning a winning combination in which a jackpot gaming state can be generated by the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as “big jackpot starting role”) is determined by the first special symbol lottery. It is set higher than the probability of winning.
In the present embodiment, the “big jackpot” is “big hit 1”, “big hit 2”, or “small hit 1” to “small hit 3”.
Therefore, the player advances the game with the aim of obtaining more opportunities for the second special symbol lottery.
However, in the pachinko machine 1, it is difficult to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery while the time reduction control is stopped, while on the other hand, an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery may be obtained during the execution of the time reduction control. It becomes easy.
Accordingly, since it is difficult to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery while the time-shortening control is stopped, the player can play the “big hit” (“big hit 1” in which the short-time control is started by the first special symbol lottery. )) To advance the game aiming to win.
On the other hand, since it becomes easy to obtain the second special symbol lottery during execution of the short-time control, the player can play the special combination ("V prize winning" in which the big hit gaming state can be caused by the second special symbol lottery. The game progresses with the aim of winning the “possible jackpot”, “big hit 1” or “big hit 2”).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, obtaining the opportunity for the second special lottery is advantageous to the player as opposed to obtaining the opportunity for the first special symbol lottery.
And during execution of time-shortening control, it becomes easier to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery as compared to when time-shortening control is stopped.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the time-saving control of each time is as follows: (1) winning a “big win” by special symbol lottery; (2) V winning (passing through the V area by the game ball) during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state ) Has been detected, (3) the total number of fluctuations executed during the time reduction control has reached a predetermined first time reduction number (100 [times] in this embodiment), and (4) time reduction control. The process is terminated when one of the conditions in which the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the process reaches a predetermined second time reduction number (4 [times] in the present embodiment) is satisfied.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area has priority over the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area. A start determination (special figure winning determination, special figure stop symbol determination, special figure fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) is executed.
As a result, when the time-shortening control is terminated in response to the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 executed during the time-shortening control reaching a predetermined second time-shortening number (4 [times] in the present embodiment). When the special figure 2 starting information of “1” or more is stored in the special figure 2 starting information storage area (when the special figure 2 holding number is “1” or more), after the time-shortening control ends. Even if there is a special figure winning determination (second special symbol lottery) for all the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the player is in an advantageous state. .
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the following “continuous-changing period” is defined as a gaming period in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player (a state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed).
That is, as shown in FIG. 46, in the pachinko machine 1, when the “big hit 1” is won by the first special symbol lottery executed during the stop of the short time control, the end of the big hit gaming state (start of the short time control). ).
The continuous time period continues as long as the time-shortening control is being executed or the jackpot gaming state is occurring.
When the time-shortening control is stopped in response to the value of the time-shortening counter (the first time-shortening counter or the second time-shortening counter) being “0”, the continuous time period is shown in FIG. If the special figure 2 starting information is not stored (the special figure 2 holding number is “0”), the process is terminated in accordance with the termination of the time-saving control.
In the following description, when the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the time reduction counter (the first time reduction counter or the second time reduction counter) becoming “0”, it is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. The special figure 2 starting information is referred to as “temporary stop-time reserved special figure 2 starting information”. In addition, the special figure 2 start information for which the start determination is executed lastly among the short-time-end hold special figure 2 start information is referred to as “final special figure 2 start information”.
On the other hand, when the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the time reduction counter (the first time reduction counter or the second time reduction counter) being “0” during the continuous time period, the special figure 2 start information storage area When “1” or more special figure 2 start information is stored (the special figure 2 holding number is “1” or more), the information is not ended in accordance with the end of the time-saving control. In this case, the continuous Chang period is continued at least until the end of the small hit gaming state generated based on the final special figure 2 start information (holding at all short-time end except the special special figure 2 start information) Special figure 2 start information indicates "V winning prize not winning"). At this time, if the passing of the V area by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the continuous chain period is ended in accordance with the end of the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, when the passing of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the continuous chain period is continued thereafter.
In the following description, the period from the stop of the short-time control to the end of the small hit gaming state (small hit gaming state related to the end of the continuous Chang period) generated based on the starting information of the final special figure 2 is expressed as “ “Advantageous period after time reduction”.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of different game states (during execution of the time-shortening control, during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and during the stop of the time-shortening control (advantageous period after the time reduction)) A period is specified.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1, during a continuous change period, effects in a predetermined manner (variation effect, stop effect, small hit effect, V winning effect, and jackpot effect) are executed. That is, during the continuous Chang period, a variation effect, a stop effect, a small win effect, a V winning effect, and a big win effect are executed that share the same theme (theme) with each other. The
That is, during the continuous Chang period, during the execution of the short-time control, during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, and during the stop of the short-time control (the advantageous period after the short-time), the effect (related aspects (contents) ) Is performed.
As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can give the player an impression that a series of gaming states continues during the continuous period.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state related to the “first win” and during the continuous Chang period, the effect (variation effect, stop effect, A jackpot effect, a V winning effect, and a jackpot effect) are executed.
Here, “first win” means “big hit” (“big hit 1” or “big hit 2”) won from the first special symbol lottery (starting determination) executed while the time-shortening control is stopped.
Then, when the “first win” is won, the judge effect is executed as the jackpot effect executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state related to the “first win”.
The judge effect includes a teammate character selection effect and a judge result effect.
Then, in the teammate character selection effect, it becomes possible to select the type of teammate character ("friend character A" to "friend character C") in accordance with the pressing operation of the effect button 5b by the player.
In addition, the judgment result effect suggests whether or not the time-saving control is started after the jackpot gaming state is ended (whether or not the continuous time period is started). At this time, whether or not the short-time control is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state according to the effect content corresponding to the type of the friendly character selected by the friendly character selection effect (whether or not the continuous Chang period is started) Is suggested.

When “big hit 1” is won as the “first win”, the time-shortening control is started in response to the end of the big hit game state related to “first win”, and the continuous period is started.
And it is executed during the occurrence of the notification effect (variation effect and stop effect) executed during the notification display based on the second special symbol lottery (start determination) executed during the continuous Chang period, and the occurrence of the small hit gaming state. A battle effect is executed as a small hit effect.
In the battle effect, an effect image in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle each other is displayed. Depending on the content of the effect image, a special symbol lottery result (“V winning winning bonus” or “V winning impossible bonus”) is displayed. Suggested (notified). At this time, as a teammate character, a teammate character related to the type selected by the teammate character selection effect related to “first hit” is set.

In addition, based on the second special symbol lottery (starting determination) executed during the consecutive Chang period, “V winning winning jackpot” is won and the passing of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state. In the case of being played, a round number suggesting effect (initial notification effect) is executed as the V winning effect.
Here, when the no-addition mode is selected as the round number suggestion effect mode, the initial notification effect is executed as the round number suggestion effect during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state.
On the other hand, when the mode with the extra number is selected as the mode of the round number suggestion effect, the initial notification effect is executed and the occurrence of the jackpot game state is generated during the occurrence of the small hit game state as the round number suggestion effect. During this, an extra effect of 1 [times] or more is executed.
In the round number suggestion effect, the number of round games executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state that occurs in response to the passing of the V region by the game ball is suggested.

Here, when “V winning winning small hit” is won based on the second special symbol lottery (starting determination) executed during the continuous Chang period, the first pre-determination and the second pre-determination are executed. .
In the first pre-determination, the content of the special figure 2 start information in which the start determination is executed first to third of the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (special figure win determination) Result).
On the other hand, in the second pre-determination, the contents of all the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (result of the special figure success determination) are determined.
In the present embodiment, a single battle effect and a continuous battle effect are set as the types of battle effects.
Then, based on the second special symbol lottery (starting determination) executed during the consecutive Chang period, “V winning winning jackpot” is won and the passing of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state. In the case of being made, the result of the first preliminary determination is suggested by the type of battle effect executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.
At this time, the expected value when the continuous battle effect is executed is higher than the expected value when the single battle effect is executed. The “expected value” here is the special figure 2 start information related to the first pre-determination (the first to third of the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is the start determination). This is an expected value for the fact that the special figure 2 start information to be executed) includes special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won.

In addition, based on the second special symbol lottery (starting determination) executed during the consecutive Chang period, “V winning winning jackpot” is won and the passing of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state. In the case of being played, a battle type suggesting effect is executed as a jackpot effect executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state.
In the battle type suggestion effect, on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23, an effect image in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other is displayed, and depending on whether or not both confronting characters start a battle, The type of battle effect to be executed after the end is suggested (notified).
Here, in the battle type suggestion effect, a teammate character related to the type selected by the teammate character selection effect related to “first hit” is set as the teammate character. In addition, when a continuous battle effect is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, an enemy character (facing character) that confronts the battle type suggestion effect as an enemy character that appears in the continuous battle effect (each individual battle effect) ) Is set.

Further, during the execution of the battle suggestion effect, whether or not the continuous battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is suggested depending on whether or not the battle icon is acquired.
Specifically, when a battle icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of the battle type suggestion effect (when the battle icon is acquired), after the jackpot gaming state ends, Continuous battle production is executed.
On the other hand, when the battle icon is not displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of the battle type suggestion effect (when the battle icon is not acquired), after the jackpot gaming state ends, A single battle effect is executed.
Further, during the execution of the battle effect, the result of the second prior determination is suggested depending on whether or not the celebration icon has been acquired.
Specifically, when the celebration icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during execution of the battle type suggestion effect (when the celebration icon is acquired), a special figure related to the second prior determination is performed. 2 It is determined that the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination is won is included in the special start 2 (special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the continuation rate is increased by executing predetermined effects (variation effect, stop effect, small win effect, V winning effect, and jackpot effect) during the continuous period. It can be suggested to the player that the high game period (continuous Chang period) continues.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, when the time reduction control is started, a predetermined first time reduction number (100 [times] in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the first time reduction counter, and the second time reduction is set. A predetermined second time reduction number (4 [times] in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the counter.
Further, when the time reduction control is started, a predetermined first initial value (101 [times] in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the first special variation counter, and the value of the second special variation counter As a predetermined second initial value (4 [times] in the present embodiment).
Here, the predetermined first initial value is larger than the predetermined first time reduction number. On the other hand, the predetermined second initial value is the same value as the predetermined second time reduction number.
And every time special symbol lottery (one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery) is executed after the start of the time-shortening control, “1” is subtracted from the value of the first time-shortening counter. Then, “1” is subtracted from the value of the first special variation counter.
In addition, every time the second special symbol lottery is executed after the start of the time reduction control, “1” is subtracted from the value of the second time reduction counter and “1” is subtracted from the value of the second special fluctuation counter. Is done.
At this time, each counter (the first time-shortage counter, the second time-shortage counter, the first special variation counter, and the second special variation counter) is subtracted in accordance with the end of the special symbol stop display based on each special symbol lottery. Is done.
In addition, each counter (each of the 1st time reduction counter, the 2nd time reduction counter, the 1st special fluctuation counter, and the 2nd special fluctuation counter) finishes the special symbol fluctuation display based on each special symbol lottery (start of the stop display). ) May be subtracted according to ().
Then, when the value of one of the time reduction counters among the value of the first time reduction counter and the value of the second time reduction counter becomes “0”, the time reduction control is terminated. At this time, “0” is set as the value of the other time saving counter among the value of the first time saving counter and the value of the second time saving counter.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1, based on the value of the first special variation counter, the type of variation pattern related to the variation display of the first special symbol executed based on the first special symbol lottery (special diagram 1 start information) ( Variation pattern number) is determined.
In addition, based on the value of the second special variation counter, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern related to the variation display of the second special symbol executed based on the second special symbol lottery (special diagram 2 start information) is It is determined.
Specifically, the RAM 230 is provided with a first special variation flag region and a second special variation flag region.
When the value of the first special variation counter is updated, a value corresponding to the updated value of the first special variation counter is set in the first special variation flag area.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 48A, when the count value of the first special variation counter is “101” to “2”, “1” is set in the first special variation flag area, When the count value of one special variation counter is “1”, “2” is set in the first special variation flag area, and when the count value of the first special variation counter is “0”, “0” is set in one special variation flag area.
When the value of the second special variation counter is updated, a value corresponding to the updated second special variation counter value is set in the second special variation flag area.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 48B, when the count value of the second special fluctuation counter is “4”, “3” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area, and the second special fluctuation counter When the count value of “2” is “3” to “1”, “4” is set in the second special variation flag area, and when the count value of the second special variation counter is “0”, 2. “0” is set in the special variation flag area.

Further, the ROM 230 stores a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the special figure 1 start information and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the special figure 2 start information.
Furthermore, as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table, the special figure 1 fluctuation corresponding to each value (each of “0”, “1”, and “2” in this embodiment) that can be set in the first special fluctuation flag area. Stores a pattern determination table.
Further, as the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to each value (each of “0”, “3”, and “4” in this embodiment) that can be set in the second special fluctuation flag area. Stores a pattern determination table.
As shown in FIG. 49 (a), in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where "0" is set in the first special fluctuation flag area, each special figure 1 hold number ("0"). To “4”), “normal fluctuation” (“normal fluctuation (during winning)” or “normal fluctuation (during winning)”) is registered (defined).
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49B, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where “1” is set in the first special fluctuation flag area, each special figure 1 hold number (“0”). To “4”), “confrontation waiting fluctuation” (“confrontation waiting fluctuation (at the time of winning)” or “confrontation waiting fluctuation (at the time of defeat)”) is registered (defined).
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49C, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where “2” is set in the first special fluctuation flag area, each special figure 1 hold number (“0”). To “4”), “result notification variation” (“result notification variation (at the time of winning)” or “result notification variation (at the time of defeat)”) is registered (defined).
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50A, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where “3” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area, each special figure 2 hold number (“0”) is set. To “4”), “confrontation introduction fluctuation” (“confrontation introduction fluctuation (when winning)” or “confrontation introduction fluctuation (when winning)”) is registered (defined).
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50B, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where “4” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area, each special figure 2 holding number (“0”). To “4”), “confrontation reach variation” (“confrontation reach variation (at the time of winning)” or “confrontation reach variation (at the time of defeat)”) is registered (defined).
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50C, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the case where “0” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area, the special figure 2 hold number is “0” or As a type of variation pattern corresponding to “1”, “result notification variation” (“result notification variation (at the time of winning)” or “result notification variation (at the time of defeat)”) is registered (specified), 2 “Confrontation reach fluctuation (during winning)” is registered (specified) as the type of fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the number of holdings is “2” to “4”.

As described above, when “0” is set in the first special variation flag area (when the count value of the first special variation counter is “0”), the first special variation flag area is set to the first special variation flag. “Normal variation” is selected as the type of variation pattern related to the symbol variation display. At this time, if “big hit” is determined by the special figure winning determination, “normal fluctuation (at the time of winning)” is selected, and if “losing” is determined by the special figure winning determination, “Normal fluctuation (at the time of loss)” is selected.
On the other hand, when “1” is set in the first special variation flag area (when the count value of the first special variation counter is “101” to “2”), regardless of the special figure 1 holding number, “Confrontation waiting variation” is selected as the variation pattern type related to the variation display of the first special symbol. At this time, when “big hit” is determined by the special figure winning determination, “confrontation waiting fluctuation (at the time of winning)” is selected, and when “offset” is determined by the special figure winning determination, “Confrontation waiting fluctuation (at the time of defeat)” is selected.
On the other hand, when “2” is set in the first special fluctuation flag area (when the count value of the first special fluctuation counter is “1”), the first special symbol is used regardless of the number of special figure 1 holds. “Result notification variation” is selected as the type of variation pattern related to the variation display. At this time, when “big hit” is determined by the special figure winning determination, “result notification fluctuation (at the time of winning)” is selected, and when “missing” is determined by the special figure winning determination, “Result change (when lost)” is selected.
On the other hand, when “3” is set in the second special variation flag area (when the count value of the second special variation counter is “4”), the second special symbol is used regardless of the special figure 2 holding number. “Confrontation introduction fluctuation” (individual battle effect or single battle effect) is selected as the type of the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation display. At this time, if “special role” is determined by the special figure winning judgment, “conversion introduction change (at the time of winning)” is selected, and “other results excluding the specific part” are determined by the special figure winning judgment. If it is determined, “confrontation change (at the time of loss)” is selected.
On the other hand, when “4” is set in the second special variation flag area (when the count value of the second special variation counter is “3” to “1”), regardless of the special figure 2 holding number, “Confrontation reach variation” (individual battle effect or single battle effect) is selected as the type of variation pattern related to the variation display of the second special symbol. At this time, if “special role” is determined by the special figure winning judgment, “confrontation reach change (at the time of winning)” is selected, and “other results excluding the special part” are determined by the special figure winning judgment. If determined, “confrontation reach fluctuation (at the time of loss)” is selected.
On the other hand, when “0” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area (when the count value of the second special fluctuation counter is “0”), the special figure 2 holding number is “0” or “1”. Is "result notification fluctuation" as the type of fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and when the special figure 2 reservation number is "2" to "4", the fluctuation of the second special symbol “Confrontation reach variation” is selected as the type of variation pattern for display. At this time, if the “specific role” is determined by the special figure winning determination, “result announcement fluctuation (at the time of winning)” or “confrontation reach fluctuation (at the time of winning)” is selected. When the “other results excluding the specific combination” is determined, “result notification change (at the time of loss)” or “confrontation reach change (at the time of loss)” is selected.

For example, after the start of the time reduction control, the second special symbol lottery is continuously executed without executing the first special symbol lottery, and the value of the second time reduction counter becomes “0”. Accordingly, when the time-shortening control is terminated and the number of the time-short-time-holding special figure 2 starting information is “4”, as shown below, it relates to the variable display of the second special symbol as shown below. The type of variation pattern is selected. In addition, after the start of the time reduction control, the second special symbol lottery is continuously executed without the second special symbol lottery being executed, and then the second special symbol lottery is continuously executed. Similarly, when the value of the second time reduction counter becomes “0”, the time reduction control is ended, and the number of the time reduction end holding special figure 2 starting information is “4”, As shown below, the type of variation pattern related to the variation display of the second special symbol each time is selected.
That is, at the time of execution of the first second special symbol lottery (starting determination based on the special figure 2 start information) executed during the time-shortening control, the value of the second special fluctuation counter = “4”, the second special fluctuation flag area = “3”. Accordingly, “confrontation introduction variation” (individual battle effect or single battle effect) is selected as the type of the variation pattern related to the first variation display of the second special symbol executed during the short-time control.
In addition, when the second to fourth second special symbol lottery (starting determination based on the special figure 2 starting information) executed during the time-shortening control is executed, the value of the second special variation counter = “3” to “1”. Second special variation flag area = “4”. Therefore, “confrontation reach variation” (individual battle effect or single battle effect) is selected as the type of variation pattern related to the second to fourth variation display of the second special symbol executed during the time-saving control.
Further, at the time of execution of the first second special symbol lottery (start determination based on the special figure 2 start information) executed after the end of the time-shortening control, the value of the second special fluctuation counter = "0", the second special fluctuation flag The area = “0” and the special figure 2 holding number = “4”. Accordingly, “confrontation reach variation” (individual battle effect or single battle effect) is selected as the type of variation pattern related to the first variation display of the second special symbol executed after the end of the time-saving control.
In addition, when the second special symbol lottery (start determination based on the special figure 2 start information) executed after the end of the time reduction control is executed, the value of the second special fluctuation counter = “0”, the second special fluctuation flag. The area = “0” and the special figure 2 holding number = “3”. Accordingly, “confrontation reach variation” (individual battle effect or single battle effect) is selected as the type of variation pattern related to the second variation display of the second special symbol that is executed after the end of the time reduction control.
In addition, when the third special symbol lottery (start determination based on the special figure 2 start information) executed after the time-shortening control is executed, the value of the second special fluctuation counter = “0”, the second special fluctuation flag. The area = “0” and the special figure 2 holding number = “2”. Accordingly, “confrontation reach variation” (individual battle effect or single battle effect) is selected as the type of variation pattern related to the variation display of the second special symbol executed for the third time after the end of the time reduction control.
Furthermore, at the time of execution of the second special symbol lottery (start determination based on the special figure 2 start information) executed after the end of the time reduction control, the value of the second special fluctuation counter = “0”, the second special fluctuation flag. The area = “0” and the special figure 2 holding number = “1”. Therefore, “result notification change” (individual battle effect or single battle effect) is selected as the type of the change pattern related to the change display of the second second special symbol executed after the end of the time reduction control.

On the other hand, after the start of the time reduction control, the first special symbol lottery is continuously executed without executing the second special symbol lottery, and the value of the first time reduction counter becomes “0”. Accordingly, when the time reduction control is terminated, as shown below, the type of variation pattern related to the variation display of the first special symbol is selected.
That is, at the time of execution of the first to 100th first special symbol lottery (start determination based on the special figure 1 start information) executed during the time reduction control, the value of the first special variation counter = “101” to “2”. First special variation flag area = “1”. Therefore, “confrontation waiting variation” is selected as the type of variation pattern related to the first to 100th variation display of the first special symbol executed during the time reduction control.
When the first first special symbol lottery (start determination based on the special figure 1 start information) executed after the time-shortening control is executed, the value of the first special fluctuation counter = “1”, the first special fluctuation flag. Region = “2”. Therefore, “result notification change” is selected as the type of change pattern related to the first change display of the first special symbol executed after the end of the time-saving control.
Furthermore, at the time of the second and subsequent first special symbol lottery (start determination based on the special figure 1 start information) executed after the end of the time-shortening control, the value of the first special fluctuation counter = “0”, the first special fluctuation. The flag area = “0”. Therefore, “normal variation” is selected as the variation pattern type related to the variation display of the first special symbol after the second time that is executed after the end of the time reduction control.
As described above, it is possible to select the type of variation pattern related to the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) regardless of the value of the hour / hour counter (the first hour / second counter). It becomes.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, when the variation display of the first special symbol executed after the end of the time reduction control is the variation display related to the first special symbol, the variation pattern related to the variation display of the first special symbol. As a type, “result notification fluctuation” is selected.
As a result, it is possible to execute the “result notification variation effect” during the first variation display of the first special symbol performed after the end of the time-shortening control.
For example, when the time reduction control is ended in response to the execution of the first special symbol lottery (when the time reduction control is ended in response to the value of the first time reduction counter becoming “0”), the time reduction control is executed. When the first special symbol lottery (start determination based on the special figure 1 start information) executed after the end of the first special fluctuation counter value = “1”, the first special fluctuation flag area = “2” "
In addition, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table (the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of winning or the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of loss) corresponding to the case where “2” is set in the first special fluctuation flag area. As a type of variation pattern corresponding to each special figure 1 hold number (“0” to “4”), “result notification variation” (“result notification variation (at the time of winning)” or “result notification variation (at the time of loss)” ) Is registered (regulated).
As a result, “result notification change” is selected as the type of change pattern related to the first change display of the first special symbol executed after the end of the short-time control.
Therefore, by defining the variation time corresponding to the “result notification variation” to be a time during which the “result notification variation effect” can be executed, the first first time that is executed after the time-shortening control is completed. It is possible to execute the “result notification fluctuation effect” during the execution of the special symbol fluctuation display.
Therefore, normally, the time reduction control is terminated in accordance with the execution of the second special symbol lottery (in response to the value of the second time reduction counter becoming “0”), the execution of the first special symbol lottery is executed. Accordingly, even when the time reduction control is ended (when the time reduction control is ended in response to the value of the first time reduction counter being “0”), when the time reduction control is ended, It is possible to execute “result notification fluctuation effect”.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the short-time end holding special figure 2 start information exists at the end of the time-shortening control, the second special-purpose figure 2 start information based on the final special figure 2 start information among the short-time end holding special figure 2 start information. “Result notification fluctuation” is selected as the type of fluctuation pattern related to the special symbol fluctuation display.
This makes it possible to execute the “result notification fluctuation effect” during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the final special figure 2 start information.
For example, the time-shortening control is terminated in response to the execution of the second special symbol lottery (the time-shortening control is terminated in response to the value of the second time-shortening counter becoming “0”), and the time-shortening-end holding special figure When there is only “1” of 2 start information, the “1” time-short-end-reserved special figure 2 start information becomes the final special figure 2 start information. When the start determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is executed, the value of the second special variation counter = “0” and the second special variation flag area = “0”.
In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (the winning special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table or the lost special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table) corresponding to the case where “0” is set in the second special fluctuation flag area. As a type of variation pattern corresponding to the special figure 2 number of holds = “1”, “result notification variation” (“result notification variation (at the time of winning)” or “result notification variation (at the time of loss)”) is registered (normative). Has been.
As a result, “result notification fluctuation” is selected as the type of fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the final special figure 2 start information.
Therefore, by defining the variation time corresponding to the “result notification variation” to be a time during which the “result notification variation effect” can be executed, the second special symbol based on the final special figure 2 start information is provided. It is possible to execute the “result notification fluctuation effect” during the execution of the fluctuation display.

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the total number of notification displays of the first special symbol and the notification display of the second special symbol executed during the time reduction control is counted by the first time reduction counter. In addition, the number of second special symbol notification displays executed during the time reduction control is counted by the second time reduction counter. The time reduction control includes a plurality of times that the total number of times counted by the first time reduction counter has reached the first time reduction number and that the number of times counted by the second time reduction counter has reached the second time reduction number. The process is terminated when one of the conditions is satisfied.
As a result, a plurality of conditions having different contents are set as conditions for terminating the time reduction control. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the trigger for the completion of the time-saving control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, counting of the number of executions of the notification display of the second special symbol by the second special variation counter is started in accordance with the start of the time reduction control. In the special figure fluctuation pattern determination based on the special figure 2 starting information, the type of the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number of times counted by the second special fluctuation counter.
Thereby, according to the frequency | count of the notification display of the 2nd special symbol performed after the start of time-shortening control, the alerting | reporting aspect (mode of a change effect and the aspect of a stop effect) concerning the alert display of a 2nd special symbol is determined. Can do.
In particular, according to the number of times the second special symbol notification display is executed after the start of the time reduction control, the notification mode (variation effect mode and stoppage) related to the second special symbol notification display executed after the time reduction control ends. A mode of production) can be determined.
Therefore, it is possible to diversify the notification mode related to the notification display of the second special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, during execution of the time-shortening control, a predetermined variation pattern of a predetermined variation pattern is used regardless of the number of special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (the number of special figure 2 holds). The type is determined. On the other hand, during the stop of the time-saving control, the notification mode is determined according to the number of special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (the number of special figure 2 holds).
As a result, it is possible to further diversify the notification mode relating to the notification display of the second special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, counting of the total number of executions of the notification display of the first special symbol and the notification display of the second special symbol by the first special variation counter is started in accordance with the start of the time reduction control. Then, in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination based on the first start information, the type of the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number of times counted by the first special fluctuation counter.
Thus, according to the total number of notification displays of the first special symbol and the notification display of the second special symbol executed after the start of the time-shortening control, the notification mode (the mode of variation effect and The mode of stop effect) can be determined.
In particular, according to the total number of notification displays of the first special symbol and the notification display of the second special symbol executed after the start of the time reduction control, it relates to the notification display of the first special symbol executed after the end of the time reduction control. A notification mode (a variation effect mode and a stop effect mode) can be determined.
Therefore, it is possible to diversify the notification mode related to the notification display of the first special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification)
As mentioned above, although embodiment of this invention was described, in the said embodiment, a various change is possible.
For example, in the above embodiment, at the end of the special symbol stop display, the values of the respective counters (the first short time counter, the second short time counter, the first special variation counter, and the second special variation counter) are updated (subtracted). Is done.
As a result, when the time reduction control is stopped because the value of the time reduction counter (the first time reduction counter or the second time reduction counter) becomes “0”, the time reduction counter (the first time reduction counter or the second time reduction counter) In response to the end of the special symbol stop display that triggers the update of the value of “0”, the time-saving control is stopped.
However, at the end of the special symbol fluctuation display (at the start of the special symbol stop display), each counter (the first short time counter, the second short time counter, the first special fluctuation counter, and the second special fluctuation counter, respectively) A configuration may be adopted in which the value is updated (subtracted).
As a result, when the time reduction control is stopped because the value of the time reduction counter (the first time reduction counter or the second time reduction counter) becomes “0”, the time reduction counter (the first time reduction counter or the second time reduction counter) The time-shortening control is stopped in response to the end of the change display of the special symbol that triggers the update of the value of “0” (start of the stop display).

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the time reduction control is stopped because the value of the second time reduction counter becomes “0”, the start determination executed first time after the completion of the time reduction control is performed. When it is determined whether or not the start determination is based on the 1 start information, and when it is determined that the start determination executed for the first time after the end of the short-time control is the start determination based on the special figure 1 start information In the special figure fluctuation pattern determination based on the special figure 1 start information, “result notification fluctuation” may be selected as the type of fluctuation pattern.

In the above embodiment, the effect control circuit 300 sets the value of the time reduction counter (remaining time reduction number) specified by the time reduction number designation command (at least one of the first time reduction number designation command and the second time reduction number designation command). Based on this, it may be configured to execute an effect that suggests the value of the time reduction counter (the remaining number of time reductions).
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the effect control circuit 300 uses the special counter value (first special variation counter) designated by the special number designation command (at least one of the first special number designation command and the second special variation number designation command). Or the value of the second special variation counter) may be configured to execute an effect suggesting the value of the special variation counter.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 11 Game board 23 Image display device 24 Drum type display device 30 Game area 30a Left side route 30b Right side route 41 Start gate 51 First start port 52 Second start port 52a Ordinary electric equipment 53 Grand prize device 53a Special electric hand Item 54 Award winning device 54a Special electric accessory 200 Main control circuit 300 Production control circuit

Claims (3)

First game information acquisition means for acquiring first game information in response to establishment of the first acquisition condition;
First game information storage means for storing the first game information acquired by the first game information acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Second game information acquisition means for acquiring second game information in response to establishment of the second acquisition condition;
Second game information storage means for storing the second game information acquired by the second game information acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
In accordance with the establishment of the first start condition, based on the first game information stored in the first game information storage means, a win determination for determining whether or not to cause a specific gaming state and a notification mode are determined. A first start time determination means for executing a first start time determination including:
Based on the second game information stored in the second game information storage means according to the establishment of the second start condition, a win determination for determining whether or not to cause a specific game state and a notification mode are determined. A second start time determination means for performing a second start time determination including:
First notification display means for executing a first notification display according to the notification mode determined by the first startup determination when the first startup determination is performed;
A second notification display means for executing a second notification display according to the notification mode determined by the second startup determination when the second startup determination is performed;
Predetermined game state control means for starting a predetermined game state that facilitates establishment of the second acquisition condition in response to establishment of the predetermined condition;
First counting means for counting the total number of first notification display and second notification display executed during the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state;
Second counting means for counting the number of times of second notification display executed during occurrence of the predetermined gaming state;
Third counting means for starting counting of the number of times of execution of the second notification display in response to the start of the predetermined gaming state,
The predetermined gaming state control means that the total number of times counted by the first counting means has reached a first predetermined number of times, and that the number of times counted by the second counting means has reached a second predetermined number of times. , The predetermined gaming state is terminated when one condition among a plurality of conditions including
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second start time determining means determines the notification mode based on the number of times counted by the third counting means. The second start time determination means includes:
When the number of times counted by the third counting means has not reached the second predetermined number of times, a predetermined notification mode regardless of the number of second game information stored in the second game information storage means Determine
When the number of times counted by the third counting means has reached the second predetermined number of times, a notification mode corresponding to the number of second game information stored in the second game information storage means is determined. The gaming machine according to claim 1. In response to the start of the predetermined gaming state, a fourth counting means for starting counting the total number of executions of the first notification display and the second notification display,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first start time determination unit determines a notification mode based on the total number of executions counted by the fourth counting unit.

Images